Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
EBLQ05+07CAV3 EDLQ05+07CAV3 EKCB07CAV3 EK2CB07CAV3 EKMBUHCA3V3 EKMBUHCA9W1
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
English
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
5.7
1 General safety precautions
1.1
1.2
About the documentation ..........................................................
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
For the installer..........................................................................
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
2 About the documentation
2.1
2.2
About this document..................................................................
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
3 About the box
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
3.2.2
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
Control box ................................................................................
3.3.1
To unpack the control box...........................................
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the control box ........
Option box .................................................................................
3.4.1
To unpack the option box............................................
3.4.2
To remove the accessories from the option box .........
Backup heater ...........................................................................
3.5.1
To unpack the backup heater .....................................
3.5.2
To remove the accessories from the backup heater...
4 About the units and options
4.1
4.2
4.3
Overview: About the units and options......................................
Identification ..............................................................................
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit .................................
4.2.2
Identification label: Control box...................................
4.2.3
Identification label: Option box....................................
4.2.4
Identification label: Backup heater ..............................
Combining units and options .....................................................
4.3.1
Possible combinations of outdoor unit and options.....
4.3.2
Possible options for the outdoor unit...........................
4.3.3
Possible options for the control box ............................
4.3.4
Possible options for the option box .............................
4.3.5
Possible combinations of outdoor unit and domestic
hot water tank .............................................................
5 Application guidelines
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
Setting up the space heating/cooling system ............................
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
5.4.1
System layout – Standalone DHW tank......................
5.4.2
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
5.4.6
DHW pump for tank preheating ..................................
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply ............................
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
Installer reference guide
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6 Preparation
6.1
6.2
6.3
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
6.4
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
13
14
14
14
14
16
18
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
Overview: Preparation................................................................
Preparing installation site ...........................................................
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit .........
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates ........................................
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the control box...........
6.2.4
Installation site requirements of the option box............
6.2.5
Installation site requirements of the backup heater .....
Preparing water piping ...............................................................
6.3.1
Water circuit requirements ...........................................
6.3.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel prepressure .......................................................................
6.3.3
To check the water volume and flow rate ....................
6.3.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel....
6.3.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................
Preparing electrical wiring ..........................................................
6.4.1
About preparing electrical wiring..................................
6.4.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply ...................
6.4.3
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ......................................................................
6.4.4
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators .........................................................
7 Installation
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation .........................................
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs ..................
5.6.3
Power limitation process ..............................................
Setting up an external temperature sensor ................................
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Overview: Installation .................................................................
Opening the units .......................................................................
7.2.1
About opening the units ...............................................
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit..............................................
7.2.3
To open the switch box cover of the outdoor unit ........
7.2.4
To open the control box ...............................................
7.2.5
To open the option box ................................................
7.2.6
To open the backup heater ..........................................
7.2.7
To open the switch box cover of the backup heater ....
Mounting the outdoor unit...........................................................
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit..................................
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...............
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure .............................
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit.............................................
7.3.5
To provide drainage .....................................................
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ...............
Mounting the control box ............................................................
7.4.1
Precautions when mounting the control box ................
7.4.2
To install the control box ..............................................
Mounting the option box .............................................................
7.5.1
Precautions when mounting the option box .................
7.5.2
To install the option box ...............................................
Mounting the backup heater.......................................................
7.6.1
About mounting the backup heater ..............................
7.6.2
Precautions when mounting the backup heater...........
7.6.3
To install the backup heater.........................................
Connecting the water piping.......................................................
7.7.1
About connecting the water piping...............................
7.7.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............
7.7.3
To connect the water piping.........................................
7.7.4
To connect the water piping to the backup heater .......
7.7.5
About the valve kit........................................................
7.7.6
To protect the water circuit against freezing ................
7.7.7
To fill the water circuit ..................................................
7.7.8
To fill the domestic hot water tank ...............................
7.7.9
To insulate the water piping .........................................
Connecting the electrical wiring..................................................
7.8.1
About connecting the electrical wiring..........................
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring ......
7.8.3
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring ........
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
41
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
1 General safety precautions
7.8.4
7.8.5
7.8.6
7.8.7
7.8.8
7.8.9
7.8.10
7.8.11
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
To connect the main power supply .............................
To connect the user interface .....................................
To connect the shut-off valve......................................
To connect the domestic hot water pump ...................
To connect the electrical wiring on the control box .....
To connect the control box power supply ...................
To connect the interconnection cable between
control box and outdoor unit .......................................
7.8.12 To connect the electrical wiring on the option box ......
7.8.13 To connect the option box power supply ....................
7.8.14 To connect the interconnection cable between option
box and control box.....................................................
7.8.15 To connect the electrical meters .................................
7.8.16 To connect the power consumption digital inputs .......
7.8.17 To connect the alarm output .......................................
7.8.18 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF
output ..........................................................................
7.8.19 To connect the changeover to external heat source...
7.8.20 To connect the electrical wiring on the backup heater
7.8.21 To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
7.8.22 To connect the backup heater kit to the control box ...
7.8.23 To connect the valve kit ..............................................
Finishing the outdoor unit installation ........................................
7.9.1
To close the outdoor unit ............................................
Finishing the control box installation .........................................
7.10.1 To close the control box..............................................
Finishing the option box installation ..........................................
7.11.1 To close the option box...............................................
Finishing the backup heater installation ....................................
7.12.1 To close the backup heater.........................................
8 Configuration
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box.................
8.1.2
To access the most used commands .........................
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first to the
second user interface..................................................
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to the second
user interface ..............................................................
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after first power
ON...............................................................................
Basic configuration ....................................................................
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date.....................
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard...............................................
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options .................................................
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy metering) ...............
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control.....................................
8.2.6
Domestic hot water control .........................................
8.2.7
Contact/helpdesk number ...........................................
Advanced configuration/optimization.........................................
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation: advanced ...............
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced........................
8.3.3
Heat source settings ...................................................
8.3.4
System settings...........................................................
Menu structure: Overview user settings ....................................
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
9 Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
Checklist before commissioning................................................
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
9.4.3
To perform a test run ..................................................
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
10 Hand-over to the user
10.1
43
44
44
46
46
47
47
11 Maintenance and service
11.1
11.2
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
11.3
12.1
12.2
12.3
52
52
52
53
53
12.4
54
54
55
55
55
56
59
59
63
63
63
63
67
72
73
78
79
80
80
80
80
80
81
81
82
82
82
84
84
85
85
86
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
87
88
88
88
88
88
91
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 91
To pump down............................................................................ 91
To start and stop forced cooling ................................................. 91
14 Technical data
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
84
84
84
84
84
85
85
Overview: Troubleshooting.........................................................
Precautions when troubleshooting .............................................
Solving problems based on symptoms.......................................
12.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as
expected ......................................................................
12.3.2 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating)..............................
12.3.3 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) .......
12.3.4 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens..................
12.3.5 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks .........
12.3.6 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................
12.3.7 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusually high ...........................................
12.3.8 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank ..........................................................
12.3.9 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error).....................................
12.3.10 Symptom: The energy metering (produced heat) is
NOT working correctly .................................................
Solving problems based on error codes.....................................
12.4.1 Error codes: Overview .................................................
13 Disposal
13.1
13.2
13.3
84
84
84
84
Overview: Maintenance and service ..........................................
Maintenance safety precautions.................................................
11.2.1 Opening the outdoor unit .............................................
11.2.2 Opening the control box...............................................
11.2.3 Opening the option box................................................
11.2.4 Opening the backup heater..........................................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit .................
12 Troubleshooting
49
49
49
49
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
About locking and unlocking...................................................... 84
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Possible function locks ...............................................................
To check if locking is active........................................................
To activate or deactivate a function lock ....................................
To activate or deactivate button lock..........................................
92
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit......................................................
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit .....................................................
Valve kit necessity......................................................................
ESP curve: Outdoor unit.............................................................
15 Glossary
92
93
96
98
99
16 Field settings table
100
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide must be
performed by an authorized installer.
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols
DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
Installer reference guide
3
1 General safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
CAUTION
WARNING
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
Symbol
Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and
operation manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks,
read the service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user
reference guide.
1.2
For the installer
1.2.1
General
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information must be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
1.2.2
If you are not sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
NOTICE
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by Daikin.
Installation site
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any
ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the Daikin documentation).
CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
WARNING
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
Installer reference guide
4
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
1 General safety precautions
If
NOTICE
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
A siphon tube is present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are not
subjected to stress.
A siphon tube is NOT present
WARNING
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
immediately. If the valve is not closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
WARNING
Always recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
WARNING
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
NOTICE
WARNING
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant must be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
1.2.5
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
5
2 About the documentation
1.2.6
Electrical
NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Do not connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure below.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.
WARNING
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
Install power cables at least 1 metre away from televisions or radios
to prevent interference. Depending on the radio waves, a distance of
1 metre may not be sufficient.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ All field wiring must be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do not come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
NOTICE
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
2
About the documentation
2.1
About this document
Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Control box installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the control box)
Installer reference guide
6
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
3 About the box
▪ Option box installation manual:
Chapter
▪ Installation instructions
Field settings table
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the option box)
Description
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
▪ Backup heater installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the backup heater)
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/supportand-manuals/product-information/
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit) + Digital files on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/productinformation/
3
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor unit, control box, option box, and/or backup heater are
delivered on-site.
It contains information about:
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional Daikin website or via your dealer.
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
Keep the following in mind:
Technical engineering data
▪ At delivery, the unit must be checked for damage. Any damage
must be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional
Daikin website (publicly accessible).
▪ The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin
extranet (authentication required).
2.2
Installer reference guide at a
glance
Chapter
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
Description
General safety
precautions
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
Technical data
Specifications of the system
Glossary
Definition of terms
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
7
3 About the box
a
b
1×
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
3.3
d
1×
f
2×
1
c
1×
2×
1×
g
1×
General safety precautions
Addendum book for optional equipment
Outdoor unit installation manual
Operation manual
Sealing ring for shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Unit mounting plate
Control box
2
NOTICE
Control box EKCB07CAV3 is an option and cannot be
used standalone.
3.3.1
To unpack the control box
1
3.2.2
1
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
Open the outdoor unit.
3×
2
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the
control box
1
Open the control box.
2
Remove the accessories.
5×
2
Remove the accessories.
Installer reference guide
8
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
3 About the box
a
b
2×
a
b
c
2×
a
c
2×
2×
a
M4 bolts for user interface
M4 nuts for user interface
Wires for domestic hot water booster heater relay
3.5
3.4
Backup heater
Option box
NOTICE
NOTICE
▪ The backup heater is an option and cannot be used
standalone.
▪ Option box EK2CB07CAV3 is an option and cannot be
used standalone.
▪ To be able to use the backup heater, it is required that
optional control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the
system.
▪ To be able to use the option box, it is required that
optional control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the
system.
3.5.1
3.4.1
To unpack the option box
Connectors for interconnection cable between the option
box and control box EKCB07CAV3.
To unpack the backup heater
1
1
2
2
3.4.2
1
To remove the accessories from the
option box
Open the option box.
3.5.2
1
2
To remove the accessories from the
backup heater
Remove the wall bracket from the box.
Remove the accessories.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
9
4 About the units and options
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
Code
Description
CB
Control box
07
Capacity class
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
This chapter contains information about:
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
4.2.3
▪ Identifying the control box (if applicable)
Location
Identification label: Option box
▪ Identifying the option box (if applicable)
▪ Identifying the backup heater (if applicable)
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
▪ Combining the control box with options
Model identification
Example: EK 2 CB 07 CA V3
▪ Combining the option box with options
▪ Possible combinations of outdoor unit and domestic hot water tank
4.2
Identification
Code
Description
EK
European kit
2
Optional
CB
Control box
NOTICE
07
Capacity class
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
4.2.4
Identification label: Backup heater
Location
Location
Model identification
Model identification
Example: E B/D L Q 05 CA V3
Example: EK M BUH CA 3 V3
Code
Code
Explanation
Explanation
E
Monobloc outdoor heat pump
EK
European kit
B
B=Reversible (heating+cooling)
M
D
D=Heating only
Designed for low temperature monobloc and aircooled water chiller
L
Low water temperature – ambient zone: −10~
−25°C
BUH
Backup heater
CA
Model series
3
Capacity of heater kit (kW)
V3
Power supply
Q
Refrigerant R410A
05
Capacity class
CA
Model series
V3
Power supply
4.2.2
Identification label: Control box
Location
Model identification
Example: EK CB 07 CA V3
Code
EK
Description
European kit
Installer reference guide
10
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
4 About the units and options
4.3
Combining units and options
4.3.1
Possible combinations of outdoor unit
and options
a
b
c
d e
d
g
f
Outdoor unit (EBLQ05+07CAV3 or EDLQ05+07CAV3)
Refrigerant part of the outdoor unit
Hydro part of the outdoor unit
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
Backup heater kit (EKMBUHCA3V3 or EKMBUHCA9W1)
Control box EKCB07CAV3
Option box EK2CB07CAV3
Domestic hot water tank
Space heating circuit
i
FHL1
FHL2
h
Option
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
FHL3
System components required for that option
Option box
EK2CB07CAV3
Control box
EKCB07CAV3
Outdoor unit
EBLQ05+07CAV3 or
EDLQ05+07CAV3
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
Optional equipment
User interface (EKRUCBL*) O
(mandatory)
Simplified user interface
(EKRUCBS)
O
Domestic hot water tank
O
Remote outdoor sensor
(EKRSCA1)
O
PC configurator
(EKPCCAB)
O
Room thermostat
(EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
O
O
Remote sensor for wireless O
thermostat (EKRTETS)
O
Heat pump convector
(FWXV)
O
O
Backup heater kit
(EKMBUHCA3V3,
EKMBUHCA9W1)
O
O
Remote indoor sensor
(KRCS01-1)
O
O
O
O(a)
O
Field-supplied components
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
O
Preferential kWh rate
O
power supply (voltage‑free
contact)
O
Domestic hot water pump
O
O
Electric meter
O
O
O
Power consumption digital
inputs
O
O
O
Alarm output
O
O
O
Space cooling/heating ON/ O
OFF output
O
O
Changeover to external
heat source
O
O
(a)
O
Only for EBLQ05+07CAV3.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
11
4 About the units and options
4.3.2
Possible options for the outdoor unit
INFORMATION
▪ The domestic hot water tank can only be connected if
control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system.
User interface (EKRUCBL*)
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
▪ The domestic hot water tank is connected to the hydro
part of the outdoor unit, and wired to control box
EKCB07CAV3.
The additional user interface can be connected:
▪ To have both:
▪ control close to the control box,
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
▪ To have an interface containing other languages.
Following user interfaces are available:
▪ EKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor and the addendum book for optional equipment.
INFORMATION
▪ EKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
▪ EKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
▪ EKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
▪ EKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
▪ EKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
▪ EKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
For installation instructions, see "7.8.6 To connect the user
interface" on page 44.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump
convectors (FWXV).
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the LAN adapter directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the user interface to the control box.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the LAN adapter to the control box.
Simplified user interface (EKRUCBS)
▪ The simplified user interface can only be used in combination with
the main user interface.
▪ The simplified user interface acts as room thermostat and needs
to be installed in the room that you want it to control.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the simplified user interface.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
INFORMATION
Domestic hot water tank
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the LAN adapter directly to the outdoor unit.
For providing domestic hot water, a domestic hot water tank can be
connected to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the LAN adapter to the control box.
The domestic hot water tank is available in 3 types:
▪ Stainless steel tank (EKHWS and EKHWSU (only for UK))
There are 3 types available: 150, 200, and 300 litre.
▪ Enamelled tank (EKHWE and EKHWET (wallmounted version))
There are 3 types of EKHWE: 150, 200, and 300 litre.
There is 1 type of EKHWET: 150 litre.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank and addendum book for optional equipment.
4.3.3
Possible options for the control box
User interface (EKRUCBL*)
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
The additional user interface can be connected:
▪ To have both:
▪ control close to the control box,
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
▪ To have an interface containing other languages.
Installer reference guide
12
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
4 About the units and options
Following user interfaces are available:
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
▪ EKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
▪ EKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the LAN adapter directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ EKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the LAN adapter to the control box.
▪ EKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
▪ EKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
▪ EKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
▪ EKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
INFORMATION
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the LAN adapter directly to the outdoor unit.
For installation instructions, see "7.8.6 To connect the user
interface" on page 44.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the LAN adapter to the control box.
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system, you
can also connect the user interface to the control box.
Simplified user interface (EKRUCBS)
▪ The simplified user interface can only be used in combination with
the main user interface.
▪ The simplified user interface acts as room thermostat and needs
to be installed in the room that you want it to control.
4.3.4
Possible options for the option box
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room
temperature sensor.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure
the room temperature on another location.
The remote indoor sensor is connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. For installation instructions, see the installation
manual of the remote indoor sensor and the addendum book for
optional equipment.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the simplified user interface.
INFORMATION
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the
user interface is configured with room thermostat
functionality.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1, RTRNETA)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to control box
EKCB07CAV3. This thermostat can either be wired (EKRTWA) or
wireless (EKRTR1 and RTRNETA). Thermostat RTRNETA can only
be used in heating-only systems.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor
or the remote outdoor sensor.
4.3.5
Possible combinations of outdoor unit
and domestic hot water tank
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
Outdoor
unit
Domestic hot water tank
EKHWS
EKHWSU
EKHWE
EKHWET
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
EBLQ05
O
O
O
O
EBLQ07
O
O
O
O
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
EDLQ05
O
O
O
O
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
outdoor unit (or that of control box EKCB07CAV3) and a PC. It gives
the possibility to upload different language files to the user interface,
and parameters to the outdoor unit. For the available language files,
contact your local dealer.
EDLQ07
O
O
O
O
The software and corresponding operating instructions are available
on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/softwaredownloads/.
INFORMATION
▪ The domestic hot water tank can only be connected if
control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system.
▪ The domestic hot water tank is connected to the hydro
part of the outdoor unit, and wired to control box
EKCB07CAV3.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable, the "8 Configuration" on page 52 chapter, and the addendum
book for optional equipment.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
13
5 Application guidelines
5
Application guidelines
5.2.1
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the Daikin heat pump system.
Single room
Setup
NOTICE
A
B
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
c
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 52.
b
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
A
B
a
b
c
▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
5.2
Setting up the space heating/
cooling system
The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one
or more rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface used as room thermostat
Control box
Backup heater (option)
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, that is
connected to control box EKCB07CAV3. Possible installations:
▪ Control box EKCB07CAV3 is installed in the room and the user
interface is used as room thermostat.
▪ Control box EKCB07CAV3 is installed indoors, close to the
outdoor unit + user interface installed in the room and used as
room thermostat.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ How many rooms are heated or cooled by the Daikin heat pump
system?
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
Number of water temperature
zones:
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, Daikin
recommends to follow the setup guidelines below.
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Code: [C-07]
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ Code: [7-02]
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set auto emergency [A.6.C] to 1.
Benefits
▪ Cost effective. You do NOT need an additional external room
thermostat.
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
Installer reference guide
14
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Heat pump convectors
Setup
Setup
A
B
A
B
c
c
b
b
d
d
e
a
A
B
a
b
c
d
e
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
Wireless external room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment EKRTR1).
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
a
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
A
B
a
b
c
d
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the outdoor
unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X8M/6 and
X8M/7).
INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
Configuration
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
Benefits
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ Comfort. In case of under floor heating, the wireless external
room thermostat prevents condensation on the floor during cooling
operation by measuring the room humidity.
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Stylish.
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Space heating is provided by:
▪ The under floor heating
▪ The heat pump convectors
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
15
5 Application guidelines
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The
under floor heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
5.2.2
Setup
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
A
B
c
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
M1
b
d
a
A
B
a
b
c
d
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface connected to
control box EKCB07CAV3, or an external room thermostat), while
the other rooms are controlled by so-called thermostatic valves (field
supply), which open or close depending on the room temperature.
Setup
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
A
B
c
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the outdoor
unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the under floor
heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling
operation.
a
A
B
C
a
b
c
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on control box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2)
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ The shut-off valve
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
Value
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
INFORMATION
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as thermostat.
Configuration
Setting
T
b
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space operation mode is sent by one digital output (X8M/6
and X8M/7) on control box EKCB07CAV3 to:
C
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Configuration
Setting
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Unit temperature control:
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.E.5]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Benefits
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
Altherma LT.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
▪ The excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating
▪ The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Cost effective.
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
Setup
Installer reference guide
16
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
c
A
B
C
M1
M2
C
a
b
c
d
d
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode.
b
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
a
e
e
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Bypass valve
External room thermostat
▪ The heating demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on control box
EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2). The outdoor unit will only
supply leaving water temperature when there is an actual
demand.
INFORMATION
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.3 Preparing water
piping" on page 28.
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Value
Setting
Unit temperature control:
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the space operation
mode of the additional user interfaces (used as room thermostat)
must be set to match that of the main user interface.
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, and
do NOT have to be connected to the outdoor unit. The outdoor
unit will supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to
program a leaving water schedule.
▪ Code: [7-02]
Value
Unit temperature control:
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Benefits
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
Configuration
Setting
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
Setup
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
A
B
▪ Code: [7-02]
c
Benefits
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
C
M1
M1
Heat pump convectors - Multiple rooms
b
Setup
d
e
a
A
B
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
C
c
b
d
a
A
B
d
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
External room thermostat
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the outdoor unit – or to the
backup heater, if there is one.
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
17
5 Application guidelines
▪ For each room with under floor heating: Two shut-off valves (field
supply) are installed before the under floor heating:
Setup
A
B
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has
no heating demand
C
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during
cooling operation of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
f
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
d
e
D
E
c
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the operation mode
of each external room thermostat and heat pump convector
remote controller must be set to match that of the main user
interface.
b
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
A
B
C
D
E
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
Additional leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 3
User interface
Control box
Backup heater (option)
Pressure-regulating valve
Mixing valve station
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
INFORMATION
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
5.2.3
f
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ For the main zone:
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating,
and the highest design temperature in cooling
▪ Additional zone = The other zone
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat.
NOTICE
Daikin is NOT responsible for the operation of the mixing
valve station pump. It is the responsibility of the installer to
guarantee pump operation.
NOTICE
If there are two leaving water temperature zones, and an
external room thermostat is used, then cooling operation is
NOT possible.
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving
water temperature when the additional zone has demand.
Typical example:
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Living room (main zone)
Under floor heating: 35°C
Bed rooms (additional zone)
Heat pump convectors: 45°C
Installer reference guide
18
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the
outdoor unit – or to the backup heater, if there is one.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
CAUTION
Room (zone)
▪ For the additional zone:
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on control
box EKCB07CAV3 (X2M/1 and X2M/2). The outdoor unit will
only supply the desired additional leaving water temperature
when there is an actual demand.
▪ The main user interface (connected to control box EKCB07CAV3)
decides the space operation mode. Mind that the operation mode
of each heat pump convector remote controller must be set to
match that of the main user interface.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Configuration
INFORMATION
Note:
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat pump operates to achieve the desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weatherdependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
▪ Main room = user interface
used as room thermostat
functionality
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
1 (2 LWT zones): Main +
additional
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Setup
▪ Integrate the boiler as follows:
a
b
c
i
▪ Code: [7-02]
d
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
External room thermostat for the
heat pump convector can only
additional zone:
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ #: [A.2.2.5]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
▪ Code: [C-06]
Shut‑off valve
At the mixing valve station
l
j
M
e
d
j
k
f
If the main zone must be shut off
during cooling mode to prevent
condensation on the floor, set it
accordingly.
h
m
n
g
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature for heating
and/or cooling.
k
p
o
Benefits
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
▪ Comfort.
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors.
▪ Efficiency.
▪ Depending on the demand, the outdoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with Altherma LT.
5.3
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The outdoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater (option)
Control box
User interface
Option box
Motorised 3‑way valve (delivered with the domestic hot
water tank)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shut‑off valve (field supply)
Collector (field supply)
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
Aquastat valve (field supply)
Domestic hot water tank (option)
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the outdoor unit or
the auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the outdoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the outdoor unit.
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
INFORMATION
For bivalent operation to be possible, the system requires
option box EK2CB07CAV3.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already pre-mounted in the outdoor unit.
Installer reference guide
19
5 Application guidelines
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
5.4.1
System layout – Standalone DHW tank
▪ Connect X8M/3 and X8M/4 (changeover to external heat source)
on option box EK2CB07CAV3 to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating/
cooling system" on page 14.
Configuration
a
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
b
c
h
d
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
M
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
e
d
NOTICE
k
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
outdoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
FHL1
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
FHL2
j
f
FHL3
i
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
g
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FHL1...3
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating/cooling system" on page 14).
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater (option)
Control box
User interface
Motorised 3‑way valve
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Collector (field supply)
Under floor heating
▪ An electricity tariff contact
5.4.2
▪ A manually operated contact
▪ …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
L
H
Com
Control box
X2M
1 4
Outdoor/Auto/Boiler
A
K1A
N
BTI
A
H
K1A
K2A
Outdoor
Auto
Boiler
Control box
K2A
K1A
BTI
X Y
K2A
Boiler thermostat input
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
Auxiliary relay for activation of outdoor unit (field supply)
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Outdoor unit
Automatic
Boiler
Control box
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank.
Possible DHW tank volumes
Type
Standalone DHW tank
▪ 200 l
▪ 300 l
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
outdoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
Installer reference guide
20
Possible volumes
▪ 150 l
▪ 500 l
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the heat pump can increase this
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
temperature. However, this consumes more energy. Daikin
recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature below
55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
Daikin recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, Daikin recommends
to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. When you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, Daikin recommends to produce the domestic
hot water during the night when there is lower space heating
demand.
▪ For more information about:
▪ Optimizing the energy consumption for producing domestic hot
water, see "8 Configuration" on page 52.
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring of the domestic hot water tank
to control box EKCB07CAV3, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
▪ Connecting the water piping of the domestic hot water tank to
the outdoor unit, see the installation manual of the domestic hot
water tank.
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water
Setup
Determining the DHW consumption
d
b
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using the typical water
volumes:
Question
How many showers are needed
per day?
c
a
e
h
Typical water volume
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
How many baths are needed per 1 bath = 150 l
day?
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
Are there any other domestic hot —
water needs?
g
f
Outdoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water pump
Control box
Shower
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day is
as follows:
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ 3 showers
▪ For more information about the recirculation connection, see
"7.8.8 To connect the domestic hot water pump" on page 46, and
the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
Example
Configuration
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 52.
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
If:
▪ V2=180 l
5.4.5
▪ T2=54°C
Setup
DHW pump for disinfection
▪ T1=15°C
Then V1=280 l
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
j
If:
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
b
Then V2=307 l
5.4.3
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
DHW tank temperature
Cold water temperature
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ Electrical booster heater
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
c
a
d
i
▪ T1=15°C
V1
V2
T2
T1
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
f
e g
Outdoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
Heater element (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
Control box
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ The temperature of the DHW tank can be set to maximum 70°C. If
the applicable legislation requires a higher temperature for
disinfection, you can connect a DHW pump and heater element as
shown above.
Installer reference guide
21
5 Application guidelines
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
▪ For more information about the recirculation connection, see
"7.8.8 To connect the domestic hot water pump" on page 46, and
the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
If glycol is present in the system ([E‑0D]=1]), then the
produced heat will NOT be calculated, nor will it be
displayed on the user interface.
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
Configuration
The outdoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 52.
5.4.6
INFORMATION
DHW pump for tank preheating
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
▪ The power consumption of the booster heater (if applicable) in
the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
Setup
▪ No additional equipment needed.
i
b
g
c
a
e
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
d
f
Outdoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
Control box
▪ Only in case a booster heater is present in the system, measure
its capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface. Example: If you measure a booster heater
resistance of 17.1Ω, the capacity of the heater at 230 V is
3100 W.
5.5.2
Consumed energy
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring
INFORMATION
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example: for backup heater) and measuring the
consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so,
the energy data will be invalid.
▪ For the standalone DHW tank: If there is no electrical backup
heater in the space heating circuit, you must install a DHW pump
for tank preheating.
Calculating the consumed energy
Configuration
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
The outdoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 52.
5.5
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
▪ Produced heat
▪ Consumed energy
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the booster heater and the optional backup
heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for:
▪ The optional backup heater (step 1 and step 2)
▪ The booster heater
▪ For space heating
▪ For space cooling
▪ For domestic hot water production
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ Per month
▪ Per year
INFORMATION
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ When using electrical power meters, set the number of pulses/
kWh for each power meter via the user interface.
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
5.5.1
INFORMATION
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
Produced heat
INFORMATION
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply
General rule
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
Installer reference guide
22
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Setup
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 23 for
an example with two power meters.
▪ Connect the power meter to X2M/7 and X2M/8 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
5.5.4
Power meter type
General rule
In case of…
Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the refrigerant part of the outdoor unit.
Use a… power meter
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. the hydro part of the
outdoor unit, control box EKCB07CAV3, option box
EK2CB07CAV3, the backup heater kit, and the optional booster
heater).
Backup heater supplied from a
Single-phase
single-phase grid (i.e. the backup
heater model is *3V or *9W
connected to a single-phase grid)
In other cases (i.e. a *9W backup Three-phase
heater model connected to a
three-phase grid)
Setup
Example
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X2M/9 and X2M/10 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
Single-phase power meter
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X2M/7 and X2M/8 of option box
EK2CB07CAV3.
Three-phase power meter
Power meter types
▪ Power meter 1: Single-phase power meter.
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
b
0 5
1 0
▪ Power meter 2:
a
▪ In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a
single-phase power meter.
b


▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
Example
c
c
d
A
e
B
g
f
C
D
h
E
c
c
e
f
A
B
d
g
C
h
D
Three-phase backup heater:
i
0 0 58
E
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
A Outdoor unit
A Outdoor unit
B Control box
B Control box
C DHW tank
C DHW tank
D Option box
D Option box
E Backup heater kit
E Backup heater kit
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
d Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
e Control box (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/N)
f Booster heater (L1/N)
f Control box (L1/N)
g Option box (L1/N)
g Booster heater (L1/N)
b
h Backup heater (L1/N)
h Option box (L1/N)
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
c
e
g
A
Exception
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X2M/9 and X2M/10 of
option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
5.6


e
b
d
f
h
B
A
B
C
D
E
a
i Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
0 5
1 0
i
j
k
C
D
E
Outdoor unit
Control box
Domestic hot water tank
Option box
Backup heater kit
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
Power meter (L1/N)
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
Fuse (L1/N)
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
Control box (L1/N)
Booster heater (L1/N)
Option box (L1/N)
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of the outdoor unit, control box EKCB07CAV3, option box
EK2CB07CAV3, the backup heater kit, and the optional booster
heater).
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
Installer reference guide
23
5 Application guidelines
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
A
B
C
D
E
X2M
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
▪ Permanently
b
▪ By digital inputs
F
Permanent power limitation
5.6.1
A
B
C
D
E
F
a
b
c
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
Pi
DI
a
Pi
b
c
a
Outdoor unit
Control box
Option box
Backup heater kit
Domestic hot water tank
Energy management system
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
Backup heater
Booster heater
a
DI1
DI3
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Power input
Time
Digital input (power limitation level)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
b
DI4
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Setup and configuration
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the
user interface (for the description of all settings, see
"8 Configuration" on page 52):
▪ Select full time limitation mode
Setup
▪ Install control box EKCB07CAV3 and option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are
corresponding power limitation level:
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
Mind the following guidelines when selecting the desired
power limitation level:
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to
guarantee defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is
interrupted several times, the heat exchanger will
freeze up.
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3 kW to
guarantee space heating and DHW production by
allowing at least one electrical heater (backup heater
step 1 or booster heater).
5.6.2
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Current (in A)
▪ Power input (in kW)
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
Installer reference guide
24
to
activate
the
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
Configuration
Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the user
interface (for the description of all settings, see "8 Configuration" on
page 52):
▪ Select activation by digital inputs.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each digital
input.
INFORMATION
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
used
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
NOTICE
Power input
Time
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
5.6.3
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters.
Therefore, the electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first.
The system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Limits certain electrical heaters.
If… has priority
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Domestic hot water production Booster heater.
Result: The backup heater will
be turned OFF first.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
6 Preparation
If… has priority
INFORMATION
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Space heating
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves and in the automatic heating/cooling changeover
logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the
outdoor unit is always used.
Backup heater.
Result: The booster heater will
be turned OFF first.
2
3
4
Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
Limits the outdoor unit.
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
6
Preparation
6.1
Overview: Preparation
Example
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both booster
heater and backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ Heater priority = Booster heater.
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It contains information about:
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
▪ Preparing the installation site
Ph
▪ Preparing the water piping
B
Ph
Ce
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
5.7
6.2
C
Preparing installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit must be covered.
Ce
Produced heat
Consumed energy
Outdoor unit
Booster heater
Backup heater
Limited outdoor unit operation
Full outdoor unit operation
Booster heater turned ON
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
Backup heater step 2 turned ON
Choose the installation location with sufficient place for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
INFORMATION
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the indoor or outdoor ambient temperature. Daikin recommends to
use an external temperature sensor in the following cases:
Indoor ambient temperature
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface is used as room
thermostat and it measures the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore, the user interface must be installed on a location:
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
Mind the following spacing guidelines:
>250/400
b
a
▪ That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of,
for example, door opening/closing
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
indoor sensor (option KRCS01-1).
▪ Setup:
box
EKCB07CAV3
a
>250
(mm)
(mm)
a
b
Air outlet
Air inlet
INFORMATION
▪ That is NOT near a heat source
▪ Requires control
EK2CB07CAV3.
>250/400
b
▪ Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
>350
>350
a
A
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
≤1200
c
b
d
e
and
option
box
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
remote indoor sensor and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
Configuration: Select room sensor [A.2.2.F.5].
If shut-off valves are installed on the unit, provide a
minimum space of 400 mm at the air inlet side. If shut‑off
valves are NOT installed on the unit, provide a minimum
space of 250 mm.
If the system contains a domestic hot water tank, meet the following
requirements:
Maximum allowable distance
between outdoor unit and …
Distance
domestic hot water tank
10 m
3‑way valve
10 m
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
25
6 Preparation
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a
windbreaker.
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the
windbreaker.
d
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
b
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
a
a
b
c
d
b
a
c
d
c
Sea wind
Building
Outdoor unit
Windbreaker
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for
ambient temperatures ranging 10~43°C in cooling mode, –25~25°C
in space heating mode, and –25~35°C in domestic hot water
operation mode.
c
b
6.2.2
a
b
c
Baffle plate
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation
conditions, the measured value might be higher than the sound
pressure level mentioned in Sound spectrum in the data book due
to environmental noise and sound reflections.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
a
c
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
b
d
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
c
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly
exposed to sea winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high
levels of salt in the air, which might shorten the life of the unit.
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.
a
c
26
Snow cover or shed
Pedestal
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
▪ In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm
above the maximum expected level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting
the outdoor unit" on page 35 for more details.
b
Installer reference guide
a
b
c
d
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation
site where the snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is
possible, make sure that the heat exchanger coil is NOT affected by
the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or shed and a pedestal.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
6 Preparation
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the
control box
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum distance between control box and
outdoor unit
20 m
Maximum distance between control box and backup
heater kit
10 m
Maximum distance between control box and
domestic hot water tank
10 m
▪ The option box is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor locations
only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and vertical noncombustible wall.
▪ The option box is designed to operate in ambient temperatures
ranging from 5~35°C.
Do NOT install the option box in the following places:
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible.
6.2.5
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
Installation site requirements of the
backup heater
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
50
50
INFORMATION
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum distance between the backup heater and
the outdoor unit
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
600
>200
100
50
50
10 m
(mm)
▪ The control box is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor locations
only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and vertical noncombustible wall.
▪ The control box is designed to operate in ambient temperatures
ranging from 5~35°C.
>50
>50
>500
Do NOT install the control box in the following places:
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
>350
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places where frost is possible.
6.2.4
Installation site requirements of the
option box
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum distance between the option box and
control box EKCB07CAV3
3 m
If the backup heater is installed in a reversible system
(heating+cooling) and valve kit EKMBHBP1 is part of the
system, it may be required to provide more space under
the backup heater than indicated above. For more
information, refer to "7.7.5 About the valve kit" on
page 39.
▪ The backup heater is designed to be wall-mounted in indoor
locations only. Make sure the installation surface is a flat and
vertical non-combustible wall.
▪ The backup heater is designed
temperatures ranging from 5~30°C.
to
operate
in
ambient
Do NOT install the backup heater in the following places:
50
50
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
INFORMATION
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible.
50
100
50
600
(mm)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
27
6 Preparation
6.3
6.3.1
INFORMATION
Preparing water piping
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
Water circuit requirements
h
65°C
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
h
NOTICE
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen
diffusion tight according to DIN 4726. The diffusion of
oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
M
M
FCU1
FCU2
h
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
FCU3
h
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
d
k
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
FHL1
j
FHL2
FHL3
89°C
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
i
▪ Only use clean pipes
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
NOTICE
If glycol is present in the system, make sure the thread
sealant used is resistant to glycol.
▪ Closed circuit. Use the outdoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 92 for the external
static pressure curves of the outdoor unit.
▪ Water flow. It is required to guarantee a minimum flow of 12 l/min.
When the flow is lower, the system will stop operation and display
error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate
05+07 models
12 l/min
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FCU1...3
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater
Motorised 3‑way valve (supplied with the domestic hot
water tank)
Motorised 2‑way valve (field supply)
Collector
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Booster heater
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Provide a proper drain for the
pressure relief valve to avoid water coming into contact with
electrical parts.
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. The outdoor unit has
a manual air purge valve. The backup heater (option) has an
automatic air purge valve. Check that automatic air purge valves
are NOT tightened too much, so that the automatic release of air
from the water circuit is possible.
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
▪ Field supply components – Water and glycol. Only use
materials that are compatible with the water (and, if applicable,
glycol) used in the system, and with the materials used in the
outdoor unit.
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
▪ Valve – Separating circuits. When using a 3-way valve in the
water circuit make sure that the domestic hot water circuit and the
floor heating circuit is fully separated.
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 3 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve, connections,…) MUST withstand the following
temperatures:
▪ Filter. It is strongly recommended to install an additional filter on
the heating water circuit. Especially to remove metallic particles
from foul heating piping, it is recommended to use a magnetic or
Installer reference guide
28
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
6 Preparation
cyclone filter, which can remove small particles. Small particles
may damage the unit and will NOT be removed by the standard
filter of the heat pump system.
NOTICE
When circulation in each space heating/cooling loop is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum water volume is guaranteed, even if all of the
valves are closed.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
a
b
d
c
f
e
T1
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
M1
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.3.2 Domestic hot
water control: advanced" on page 67.
g
T2
T3
M2
M3
d
FHL1
FHL2
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
FHL3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
FHL1...3
T1...3
M1...3
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
Outdoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut‑off valve
Backup heater kit (optional)
Collector (field supply)
By‑pass valve (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Individual room thermostat (optional)
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
Maximum water volume
NOTICE
a
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
6.3.2
The maximum water volume depends on whether glycol is
added to the water circuit. For more information on the
addition of glycol, refer to "7.7.6 To protect the water circuit
against freezing" on page 41.
Recirculation connection
Hot water connection
Shower
Recirculation pump
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
6.3.3
A
2,4
2,1
1,8
1,5
1,2
1
0,9
0,6
To check the water volume and flow rate
The outdoor unit has an expansion vessel of 7 litre with a factory-set
pre-pressure of 1 bar.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
0,3
20
70
A
B
105
120
150
170
185
220
270
B
Pre-pressure (bar)
Maximum water volume (l)
Water
Water + glycol
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel prepressure
Minimum water volume
If
The system contains a backup
heater
Then
The minimum water volume is
10 l(a)
The system does NOT contain a The minimum water volume is
backup heater
20 l(a)
(a)
The internal water volume of the outdoor unit NOT
included.
INFORMATION
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
29
6 Preparation
Installation
height
difference(a)
≤7 m
Water volume
≤185/105 l
(b)
>185/105 l
(b)
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
Do the following:
▪ Decrease the prepressure according to
the required installation
height difference. The
pre-pressure
should
decrease by 0.1 bar for
each metre below 7 m.
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader
valve of the expansion vessel.
a
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
>7 m
Do the following:
▪ Increase
the
prepressure according to
the
required
installation
height
difference. The prepressure
should
increase by 0.1 bar for
each metre above 7 m.
The expansion vessel of
the outdoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
recommended to install
an extra vessel outside
the unit.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
(a)
(b)
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the outdoor unit. If the outdoor unit
is at the highest point of the installation, the installation
height is 0 m.
The maximum water volume is 185 l in case the circuit is
only filled with water, and 105 l in case the circuit is filled
with water and glycol.
Minimum flow rate
Check that the minimum flow rate (required during defrost/backup
heater operation) in the installation is guaranteed in all conditions.
If glycol was added to the water circuit, and the
temperature of the water circuit is low, the flow rate will
NOT be displayed on the user interface. In this case, the
minimum flow rate can be checked by way of the pump
test (check that the user interface does NOT display error
7H).
NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating/operation).
Minimum required flow rate
12 l/min
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 80.
6.3.4
6.3.5
Schrader valve
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
The outdoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
No actions or adjustments are required.
Example 2
The outdoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 350 l. The concentration
of propylene glycol is 35%.
Actions:
NOTICE
05+07 models
a
▪ Because the total water volume (350 l) is more than the default
water volume (105 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 150 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
▪ Because 350 l is more than 150 l, the expansion vessel is NOT
appropriate for the installation. Therefore the system requires an
external expansion vessel.
6.4
Preparing electrical wiring
6.4.1
About preparing electrical wiring
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
NOTICE
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
Installer reference guide
30
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
6 Preparation
Normal power
supply
WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
b
a
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
Power supply is
interrupted
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
5
f
3e
2
5
1
4
d
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
c
f
3
e
4
6
2
d
c
f
3
1
6
e
2 c
d
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
Remark: The
hydro part of the
electricity company
must always allow the outdoor unit (and the
power consumption control box, if part of
the system) must be
of the hydro part of
the outdoor unit (and powered by a
of the control box, if separate normal
power supply.
part of the system).
▪ All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician and must comply with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction must comply with the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
a
b
c
d
e
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
About preferential kWh rate power supply
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
Normal power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Hydro part of the outdoor unit
Refrigerant part of the outdoor unit
Control box
Backup heater kit
Power supply for outdoor unit
Interconnection cable to control box
Interconnection cable to backup heater kit
Power supply for control box
Power supply for backup heater kit
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the hydro part of
the outdoor unit in the event of a power supply interruption
of the preferential kWh rate power supply)
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
6.4.4
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
The following illustration shows the required field wiring.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
7
4
1
0 5
1 0
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
WARNING
6.4.2
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
5
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
b
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
Control box EKCB07CAV3 is designed to receive an input signal by
which it switches the outdoor unit into forced-off mode. At that
moment, the compressor will not operate.
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
6.4.3
Overview of electrical connections except
external actuators
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
31
6 Preparation
1
2
13
b
5
3
21
M
Item
4
11 9 10 7 8
a
23
e
(d)
10
Interconnection cable 2
for the space heating/
cooling operation
control (or shut‑off
valve) (between
outdoor unit and control
box)
(j)
11
Interconnection cable 3 (of which 2 are
for valve kit
shared with those
EKMBHBP1 (between of item 10)
outdoor unit and control
box)
(h)
20
17
d
19
16
M
28
25
24
6
a
b
c
d
e
29
31
30
27
26
Backup heater kit
Outdoor unit
Control box
Option box
Domestic hot water tank
User interface
Description
2
(c)
13
Preferential kWh rate
2
power supply (voltagefree contact)
(e)
14
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(d)
15
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
2
(k)
16
3‑way valve
3
(f)
17
Power supply for
booster heater and
thermal protection
(from control box)
4+GND
(a)
18
Power supply for
booster heater (to
control box)
2+GND
13 A
19
Domestic hot water
tank thermistor
2
(f)
20
Room thermostat/heat
pump convector
3 or 4
100 mA(g)
21
Valve kit EKMBHBP1
3
(i)
12
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Power supply
2+GND
1
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2
Normal kWh rate power 2
supply
(a)
6.3 A
User interface
3
2
(b)
Remote outdoor sensor 2
(c)
User interface
Optional equipment
4
Field-supplied components
5
Space heating/cooling
operation control (or
shut‑off valve)
(a)
(b)
(c)
User interface
Optional equipment
Outdoor unit
Item
(c)
2
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
(a)
(b)
Control box
(c)
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
(d)
(e)
Power supply
6
Power supply for
control box
2+GND
(a)
(f)
Interconnection cable
(g)
7
Interconnection cable
between outdoor unit
and control box
2
(b)
8
Interconnection cable
for the user interface
(between outdoor unit
and control box)
2
(c)
Installer reference guide
32
Maximum
running
current
Interconnection cable 2
for the domestic hot
water pump (between
outdoor unit and control
box)
14
c
Wires
9
12
15
18
22
Description
(h)
(i)
(j)
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
20 m.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
The thermistor and connection wire (12 m) are delivered
with the domestic hot water tank.
If valve kit EKMBHBP1 is part of the system, then the
required cable section is 0.75 mm². If valve kit EKMBHBP1
is NOT part of the system, then the minimum required
cable section is 0.75 mm², and the maximum cable length
is 10 m.
Cable section 0.75 mm².
The valve and connection wire (12 m) are delivered with
the valve kit.
If valve kit EKMBHBP1 is part of the system, then the
required cable section is 0.75 mm². If valve kit EKMBHBP1
is NOT part of the system, then the required cable section
is 1.5 mm².
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
(k)
If valve kit EKMBHBP1 is part of the system, then the
required cable section is 0.75 mm². If valve kit EKMBHBP1
is NOT part of the system, then the minimum required
cable section is 0.75 mm².
Backup heater kit
Item
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Power supply
See table below. —
Interconnection cable 6 (3V3)
between backup heater
7 (6V3, 6W1,
kit and control box
9W1)
(a)
(a)
Overview: Installation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
Required number of
conductors
Power supply
2+GND
EKMBUHCA9W1 1× 230 V
2+GND+2 bridges
3× 400 V
▪ Mounting the option box (if applicable)
▪ Connecting the water piping
EKMBUHCA3V3 1× 230 V
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring
▪ Finishing the installation of the outdoor unit
▪ Finishing the installation of the control box (if applicable)
▪ Finishing the installation of the control box (if applicable)
▪ Finishing the installation of the backup heater (if applicable)
4+GND
Option box
Item
▪ Mounting the outdoor unit
▪ Mounting the backup heater (if applicable)
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm²; maximum length: 10 m.
Backup heater
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Power supply
24
7.1
▪ Mounting the control box (if applicable)
Interconnection cable
23
Installation
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
Backup heater power
supply
22
7
Power supply for option 2+GND
box
(a)
7.2
Opening the units
7.2.1
About opening the units
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
Interconnection cable
25
Interconnection cable
between option box
and control box
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
3 (max 3 m)
(b)
2
(b)
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
Optional equipment
26
Remote indoor sensor
To open the outdoor unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Field-supplied components
27
Electric meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
28
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
(b)
29
Alarm output
2
(b)
30
Space cooling/heating
ON/OFF output
2
(b)
31
Changeover to external 2
heat source
(b)
(a)
(b)
7.2.2
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
1
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
2
NOTICE
▪ More technical specifications of the different
connections are indicated on the inside of the units
(outdoor unit, control box, option box and backup
heater).
8×
▪ For how to connect the electrical wiring to the outdoor
unit (and if part of the system, the control box, option
box, and backup heater), refer to "7.8 Connecting the
electrical wiring" on page 42.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
33
7 Installation
7.2.3
To open the switch box cover of the
outdoor unit
7.2.5
To open the option box
2
3×
1
2×
1
7.2.4
To open the control box
WARNING
The screws are delivered with toothed lock washers.
ALWAYS use toothed lock washers, also when the screws
need to be replaced. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electric shock.
2
INFORMATION
Do NOT remove the plugs from the front plate of the option
box.
7.2.6
1
To open the backup heater
2×
1
2
WARNING
The screws are delivered with toothed lock washers.
ALWAYS use toothed lock washers, also when the screws
need to be replaced. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electric shock.
INFORMATION
The holes in the front plate are for the connection of the
user interface to the control box. If you do NOT connect
the user interface to the control box, do NOT remove the
plugs from the holes.
1
2×
Installer reference guide
34
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.2.7
To open the switch box cover of the
backup heater
33
0
74
0
<
10
0
2
1
3×
7.3
Mounting the outdoor unit
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit
>300
<
10
0
28
3
(mm)
In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above
the maximum expected level of snow.
0 mm
33
When
0
You have to mount the outdoor unit before you can connect the
water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
Providing the installation structure.
Installing the outdoor unit.
Providing drainage.
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 25.
15
0
<
<
15
0
74
0
>100
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
a
7.3.2
28
3
>300
1
2
3
4
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
(mm)
a
Maximum snowfall height
It is possible to install the unit on brackets to the wall:
▪ Preparation
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
INFORMATION
For information on the available options, contact your
dealer.
If the unit is installed directly on the floor, prepare 4 sets of M8 or
M10 anchor bolts, nuts and washers (field supply) as follows:
INFORMATION
The maximum height of the upper protruding part of the
bolts is 15 mm.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
35
7 Installation
1
Lift the outdoor unit.
2
Install the outdoor unit as follows:
>300
>2
50
/40
0
a
a
a
a
1×
(mm)
a
Maximum snowfall height
1×
2
1
a
1×
3
4
Air outlet
NOTICE
Properly align the unit. Make sure the backside of the unit
does NOT protrude.
3
Remove the protective cardboard and instruction sheet.
b
a
a
b
7.3.4
Protective cardboard
Instruction sheet
To install the outdoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT remove the protective cardboard before the unit is
installed properly.
Installer reference guide
36
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
NOTICE
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
To prevent damage to the supporting feet, do NOT tilt the
unit sideways in any way:
7.3.5
To provide drainage
▪ Avoid installation places where water leaking from the unit due to
a blocked drain pan can cause damage to the location.
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is a proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
▪ When the unit is in cooling mode, condensate may also form in
the hydro part. When providing drainage, therefore make sure to
cover the entire unit.
7.4
Mounting the control box
7.4.1
Precautions when mounting the control
box
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water surrounding the unit.
INFORMATION
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does not
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent the
invasion of water in the unit and to avoid the drain water dripping
(see the following illustration).
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.4.2
To install the control box
1
Remove the front plate.
2
Hold the back plate against the wall and mark the fixation points
(2 on the top and 2 at the bottom).
NOTICE
Make sure that the marks (2 by 2) are completely level and
that their dimensions correspond to the figure below.
NOTICE
If the unit is installed in a cold climate, take adequate
measures so that the evacuated condensate cannot
freeze.
310 mm
INFORMATION
For information on the available options, contact your
dealer.
NOTICE
Provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least
100 mm above the expected level of snow.
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
318 mm
3
Drill 4 holes and install 4 plugs (suitable for M5).
4
Put the screws in the top plugs and hang the box on the
screws.
5
Put the screws in the bottom plugs.
6
Fix the 4 screws firmly.
INFORMATION
It is possible to connect the user interface to the control
box. For more information, refer to "7.8.6 To connect the
user interface" on page 44.
Installer reference guide
37
7 Installation
7.5
Mounting the option box
7.5.1
Precautions when mounting the option
box
7.6.3
1
To install the backup heater
Fix the wall bracket to the wall with M5 screws.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.5.2
To install the option box
1
Remove the front plate.
2
Hold the back plate against the wall and mark the fixation points
(2 on the top and 2 at the bottom).
2×
2
Hang the backup heater onto the wall bracket.
3
Mark the position of the hole at the bottom of the backup
heater.
4
Remove the backup heater from the wall bracket.
5
Drill a hole for the bottom screw and insert a plug.
6
Hang the backup heater onto the wall bracket. Make sure it is
fixed properly.
7
Fix the bottom of the backup heater to the wall with an M5
screw.
NOTICE
310 mm
Make sure that the marks (2 by 2) are completely level and
that their dimensions correspond to the figure below.
318 mm
3
Drill 4 holes and install 4 plugs (suitable for M5).
4
Put the screws in the top plugs and hang the box on the
screws.
5
Put the screws in the bottom plugs.
6
Fix the 4 screws firmly.
7.6
7.6.1
Mounting the backup heater
About mounting the backup heater
NOTICE
▪ The backup heater can only be installed and used in
combination with the outdoor unit and control box
EKCB07CAV3.
▪ The backup heater can only be connected to the space
heating water outlet of the outdoor unit. Other
connections are NOT allowed.
▪ Only one backup heater can be connected to the
outdoor unit. It is NOT allowed to combine multiple
heater kits in series or parallel.
7.6.2
Precautions when mounting the backup
heater
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
Installer reference guide
38
7.7
Connecting the water piping
7.7.1
About connecting the water piping
Before connecting the water piping
Make sure the outdoor unit is mounted. If applicable, also make sure
the control box and the backup heater are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Connecting the water piping of the outdoor unit.
2
Connecting the water piping of the backup heater and/or the
domestic hot water tank (if applicable).
3
4
5
6
Filling the water circuit.
Protecting the water circuit against freezing (addition of glycol).
Filling the domestic hot water tank (if applicable).
Insulating the water piping.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.7.2
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
NOTICE
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device should be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ General safety precautions
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ Preparation
7.7.3
To connect the water piping
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
NOTICE
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit. Make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 30 N•m.
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves are provided.
Mount the valves on the water inlet and on the water outlet. Mind
their position: the integrated drain valves will only drain the side of
the circuit on which they are located. To be able to only drain the
unit, make sure the drain valves are positioned between the shut‑off
valves and the unit.
7.7.4
To connect the water piping to the backup
heater
NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit. Make sure that the tightening torque does NOT
exceed 30 N•m.
1
a
Connect the water piping (field supply) to the water in- and
outlet of the backup heater.
b
a
b
Water inlet
Water outlet
1
Screw the outdoor unit nuts on the shut-off valves.
2
Connect the field piping on the shut-off valves.
3
In case of connection with the optional domestic hot water tank,
see the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
b
a
a
b
NOTICE
Water inlet
Water outlet
NOTICE
Install a manometer in the system.
When the backup heater is installed in a reversible system
(heating+cooling), and the conditions of "14.3 Valve kit
necessity" on page 96 are valid, condensation may occur
inside the backup heater. To provide a bypass for the
condensate, install valve kit EKMBHBP1. Do NOT install
any other valve kit than EKMBHBP1.
NOTICE
Install air purge valves at all local high points.
INFORMATION
Inside the backup heater, an automatic air purge valve is
installed. For instructions on how to perform an air purge,
refer to "9.4.2 Air purge function" on page 81.
7.7.5
About the valve kit
INFORMATION
Only applicable to reversible systems (heating+cooling) in
which a backup heater is installed.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
39
7 Installation
When installing the backup heater in a reversible system (heating
+cooling), and the conditions presented in "14.3 Valve kit
necessity" on page 96 are met, condensation may occur inside the
backup heater. It is required that a bypass for this condensate be
provided.
d
NOTICE
In case of valve kit malfunction or if problems arise due to
incorrect installation, the condensate that occurs inside the
backup heater may not get properly bypassed. To prevent
the condensate from doing damage, make sure all
components installed under the backup heater are
resistant to at least dripping water (IPX1).
The installation site requirements for the valve kit depend on the
required leaving water temperature setpoint (underfloor heating:
18°C – fan coil units: 5°C) and the material of the piping (copper or
Alpex). Provide sufficient space under the backup heater, according
to the figure and table below.
a
a
b
c
d
2
b
c
Sleeve
Valve motor cover
Screw
Scale
Connect the 3‑way valve body to the water inlet of the backup
heater, in accordance with one of the following four
configurations. Position the shaft in such a way that the motor
can be mounted and replaced.
E1
E2
1
1
A
3
A
Minimum required distance between backup heater and
valve kit.
Leaving water
temperature
setpoint
2
3
E3
E4
1
1
Material of the piping
Alpex(a)
Copper
18°C
A = 0.25 m
A = 0.1 m
5°C
A = 0.50 m
A = 0.2 m
(a)
2
Aluminium-reinforced polyethylene
Valve kit EKMBHBP1 contains a check valve and a 3‑way valve,
which need to be integrated into the system as follows:
2
3
2
3
a b
c
d fe j
g
i
1
2
3
3
FHL1
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
FHL2
E2+E4
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant part of the outdoor unit
Hydro part of the outdoor unit
3‑way valve (of valve kit EKMBHBP1)
Check valve (of valve kit EKMBHBP1)
Backup heater kit
Control box
Domestic hot water tank
Space heating circuit
3‑way valve (of the domestic hot water tank)
4
To connect the check valve
1
Put the sleeve on the valve and turn it until the valve is
positioned as in the figure below. It should be blocking the
outlet connection to the bypass for 50% and the outlet
connection to the backup heater for 50%.
E1+E3
FHL3
From outdoor unit
To bypass
To backup heater
Connect the check valve to the water outlet of the backup
heater.
When installing in accordance with configurations E3 or E4,
open the valve motor cover by loosening the screw and change
the jumper so as to change the rotation direction of the valve.
To connect the 3-way valve
1
Unpack the 3‑way valve body and 3‑way valve motor and verify
that the following accessories are provided with the motor.
Installer reference guide
40
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
INFORMATION
▪ Protection against bursting: the glycol will prevent the
piping from bursting, but NOT the liquid inside the
piping from freezing.
DIR
▪ Protection against freezing: the glycol will prevent the
liquid inside the piping from freezing.
2P
Y
N
L
Lowest expected
outdoor
temperature
Prevent from
bursting
Prevent from
freezing
–5°C
10%
15%
–10°C
15%
25%
INFORMATION
–15°C
20%
35%
The jumper is factory‑set to apply for installation in
accordance with configurations E1 and E2.
–20°C
25%
—
–25°C
30%
—
Position of the jumper in case of installation according to
configurations E1 and E2.
Position of the jumper in case of installation according to
configurations E3 and E4.
5
6
a
Put the knob on the motor in a 12 o'clock position and push the
motor on the sleeve. Do NOT rotate the sleeve during this
action, so as to maintain the valve position as set during step 4.
Put the scale on the valve according to the applicable
configuration.
E1+E2
a
b
7
b
b
E3+E4
a
Bypass
Backup heater
To provide stress relief, fix the power supply cable to the 3‑way
valve body with a cable tie (field supply). Fix it so that possible
condensate cannot enter the 3‑way valve motor via the cable.
NOTICE
▪ The required concentration might differ depending on
the type of glycol. ALWAYS compare the requirements
from the table above with the specifications provided by
the glycol manufacturer. If necessary, meet the
requirements set by the glycol manufacturer.
▪ The added concentration of glycol should NEVER
exceed 35%.
▪ If the liquid in the system is frozen, the pump will NOT
be able to start. Mind that if you only prevent the
system from bursting, the liquid inside might still freeze.
▪ In case of a power supply failure or pump failure, and
NO glycol was added to the system, drain the system.
▪ When water is at standstill inside the system, the
system is very likely to freeze and get damaged.
The types of glycol that can be used depend on whether the system
contains a domestic hot water tank:
If…
1×
Then…
The system contains a domestic Only use propylene glycol(a)
hot water tank
The system does NOT contain a You can use either propylene
domestic hot water tank
glycol(a) or ethylene glycol
(a)
Propylene glycol, including the necessary inhibitors,
classified as Category III according to EN1717.
The following types of glycol are allowed:
▪ Ethylene glycol;
7.7.6
To protect the water circuit against
freezing
If negative outdoor temperatures are expected, add glycol to the
water circuit. The required concentration depends on the lowest
expected outdoor temperature, and on whether you want to protect
the system from bursting or from freezing. To prevent the system
from freezing, more glycol is required. Add glycol according to the
table below.
Frost can damage the system. To prevent the hydraulic components
from freezing, the software is equipped with special frost protection
functions, that include the activation of pump, internal heaters, and/
or backup heater operation in case of low temperatures.
However, in case of a power failure, these functions cannot
guarantee protection. It is therefore recommended to add glycol to
the water circuit. The required concentration depends on the lowest
expected outdoor temperature, and on whether you want to protect
the system from bursting or from freezing. To prevent the system
from freezing, more glycol is required. Add glycol according to the
table below.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
▪ Propylene glycol, including the necessary inhibitors, classified as
Category III according to EN1717.
WARNING
Ethylene glycol is toxic.
NOTICE
Glycol absorbs water from its environment. Therefore do
NOT add glycol that has been exposed to air. Leaving the
cap off the glycol container causes the concentration of
water to increase. The glycol concentration is then lower
than assumed. As a result, the hydraulic components
might freeze up after all. Take preventive actions to ensure
a minimal exposure of the glycol to air.
Installer reference guide
41
7 Installation
NOTICE
NOTICE
The water pressure indicated on the manometer will vary
depending on the water temperature (higher pressure at
higher water temperature).
▪ If overpressure occurs, the system will release some of
the liquid through the pressure relief valve. If glycol was
added to the system, take adequate measures so as to
safely recover it.
▪ In any case, make sure that the flexible hose of the
pressure relief valve is ALWAYS free to release
pressure. Prevent water from staying and/or freezing
up inside the hose.
WARNING
Due to presence of glycol, corrosion of the system is
possible. Uninhibited glycol will turn acidic under the
influence of oxygen. This process is accelerated by the
presence of copper and high temperatures. The acidic
uninhibited glycol attacks metal surfaces and forms
galvanic corrosion cells that cause severe damage to the
system. Therefore it is important that:
▪ the water treatment is correctly executed by a qualified
water specialist,
▪ a glycol with corrosion inhibitors is selected to
counteract acids formed by the oxidation of glycols,
▪ no automotive glycol is used because their corrosion
inhibitors have a limited lifetime and contain silicates
which can foul or plug the system,
▪ galvanized pipes are NOT used in glycol systems since
the presence may lead to the precipitation of certain
components in the glycol's corrosion inhibitor.
Adding glycol to the water circuit reduces the maximum allowed
water volume of the system. For more information, refer to the
chapter "To check the water volume and flow rate" in the installer
reference guide.
7.7.7
1
To fill the water circuit
Connect the water supply hose to the drain and fill valve.
However, at all times water pressure shall remain above
1 bar to avoid air entering the circuit.
7.7.8
To fill the domestic hot water tank
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
7.7.9
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the
heating and cooling capacity.
To prevent the freezing of the outdoor water piping during winter
time, the thickness of the sealing material MUST be at least 13 mm
(with λ=0.039 W/mK).
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
During winter, protect the water piping and shut‑off valves against
freezing by adding heat tape (field supply). If the outdoor
temperature can drop below –20°C and no heat tape is used, it is
recommended to install the shut‑off valves indoors.
7.8
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.8.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure the water piping is connected.
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the units.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit (if
applicable).
Connecting the electrical wiring to control box EKCB07CAV3 (if
applicable).
3
4
Connecting the electrical wiring to option box EK2CB07CAV3 (if
applicable).
5
Connecting the electrical wiring to the backup heater (if
applicable).
6
Connecting the main power supply
7
8
Connecting the backup heater power supply (if applicable).
Connecting the user interface.
Open the drain and fill valve.
9
Connecting the shut–off valves (if applicable).
3
If an automatic air purge valve was installed, make sure it is
open.
10
11
Connecting the electrical meters (if applicable).
Connecting the domestic hot water pump (if applicable).
4
Fill the circuit with water until the manometer (field supply)
indicates a pressure of ±2.0 bar.
12
Connecting the alarm output (if applicable).
13
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output (if
applicable).
14
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source (if
applicable).
15
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs (if applicable).
2
5
Purge as much air as possible from the water circuit. For
instructions, see "9 Commissioning" on page 80.
6
Refill the circuit until the pressure is ±2.0 bar.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until no more air is purged and there are
no more pressure drops.
8
Close the drain and fill valve.
9
Disconnect the water supply hose from the drain and fill valve.
Installer reference guide
42
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
Item
Tightening torque (N•m)
Outdoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
X3M
0.8~0.9
X4M
2.2~2.7
X5M
0.8~0.9
X7M
▪ General safety precautions
Control box / option box
▪ Preparation
X1M
2.2~2.7
X2M
0.8~0.9
X4M
1.3~1.6
WARNING
X8M
0.8~0.9
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
Backup heater
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
0.8~0.9
X15M
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
7.8.3
7.8.4
Keep the following in mind:
▪ If stranded conductor wires are being used, install a round crimpstyle terminal on the tip. Place the round crimp-style terminal on
the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal with the
appropriate tool.
b
1
Remove the switch box cover. See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor
unit" on page 33.
2
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
a
a
b
b
a
b
Stranded conductor wire
Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Wire type
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
3
Strip wire end to this point
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
Insert the wiring from the back of the unit:
Installation method
cb
Single core wire
A
AA´
A´
c
a
a
a Curled single core wire
a
b Screw
c Flat washer
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
cb
a
B
bc
B
≥25 mm
a
a Terminal
a
b
c
b
c
Low voltage
High voltage
Main power supply
b Screw
NOTICE
c Flat washer
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
Routing
Possible cables (depends on the installed options)
a
▪ User interface
Low voltage
▪ Interconnection cable to control box EKCB07CAV3
▪ Remote outdoor sensor (option)
b
▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
High voltage
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
▪ Space heat/cool operation control
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
43
7 Installation
Routing
Possible cables (depends on the installed options)
c
▪ Main power supply
Main power supply
4
Inside the unit, route the wiring as follows:
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
X2M
X6Y X6YB
A2P
X1A
a
b
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring + main power supply
5
Make sure that the cable does NOT come in contact with sharp
edges.
6
Install the switch box cover.
3
X4M
X8M
1
2
3
a
b
c
c
a
12
123
S1S
GND
L
N
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Preferential power supply contact (on the control box)
CAUTION
INFORMATION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
For the exact position of connectors X6Y, X6YA, and X6YB
in the switch box, see the service manual.
To connect the main power supply
INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, the
necessity of a separate normal kWh rate power supply to
the hydro part of the outdoor unit X3M/5+6 depends on the
type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
X6Y
X6YA
A separate connection to the hydro part of the outdoor unit
is required:
A2P
X1A
X5M
X19A
1
2
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
3
▪ if no power consumption by the hydro part of the
outdoor unit is allowed at the preferential kWh rate
power supply when active.
X4M
7.8.6
X3M
123
1
2
3
a
GND
L
N
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Installer reference guide
To connect the user interface
Connection to outdoor unit
a
44
2
b
When installing field supply or option cables, foresee
sufficient cable length. This will make it possible to remove/
reposition the switch box and gain access to other
components during service.
1
1
X3M
INFORMATION
7.8.5
6
X5M
b
5
a
10
9
X6YA
X19A
INFORMATION
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is NOT part of the system,
connect the user interface directly to the outdoor unit
according to the instructions below.
▪ If control box EKCB07CAV3 is part of the system,
connect the user interface to the control box. For
instructions, see "Connection to control box" below.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
#
1
#
Action
Connect the user interface cable to the outdoor unit.
1
Onto control box
In the room
Connect the user interface cable to
control box terminals X2M/20+21.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the
cable tie mountings.
X2M
1 2
21
20
A1P
X5M
A5P
A5P
X1M
A5P
Connect the user
interface cable to
control box
terminals
X2M/20+21.
Route the cable
from the right-hand
side of the
terminals, fasten it
to the cable tie
mountings and route
it through the hole of
the low voltage
wiring.
X8M
a
a
b
a Main user interface(a)
a Main user interface
2
b Optional user interface
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the
wallplate.
X2M
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
3
Fix the wallplate of the user interface to the wall.
4
Connect as shown in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
5
Reinstall the faceplate onto the wallplate.
21
20
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when attaching the
frontplate to the unit.
(a)
Connect the control box to the outdoor unit.
1 2
X5M
The main user interface is required for operation, but has to
be ordered separately (mandatory option).
Connection to control box
▪ If you use 1 user interface, you can connect it onto control box
EKCB07CAV3 (for control close to the control box), or in the room
(where used as room thermostat).
▪ If you use 2 user interfaces, you can connect 1 user interface onto
control box EKCB07CAV3 (for control close to the control box) + 1
user interface in the room (where used as room thermostat).
3
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the wall
plate.
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
45
7 Installation
#
Onto control box
NO
In the room
Fix the wall plate of the user interface Fix the wall plate of
the user interface to
to the front panel of the control box
using the M4 bolts and nuts from the the wall.
accessory bag.
When NOT
Be careful NOT to distort the shape connecting a user
of the backside of the user interface interface to the
control box, do NOT
by overtightening the mounting
remove the plugs
screws.
from the holes in the
front plate.
3
X4M
2
X5M
1
4
X3M
2
2×
M2S
1
2×
4
INFORMATION
5
Connect as shown in 4A.
6
Reconnect the faceplate to the wall plate.
By default, the shut‑off valve is to be connected to the
outdoor unit. However, if control box EKCB07CAV3 is
present in the system, you can also connect it to the
control box. To do this, connect outdoor unit terminals
X3M/1+2 to control box terminals X8M/6+7, and then
connect the shut‑off valve to control box terminals
X8M/6+7.
Connect as shown
in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when connecting the
front panel to the control box.
4B From the left
4A From the rear
X2M
67
PCB
X3M
PCB
X8M
a
b
1×
a
b
4C From the top
4D From the top centre
a
a
b
b
M2S
7.8.8
PCB
PCB
1×
1×
b
b
a
b
1
To connect the domestic hot water pump
1
Connect outdoor unit terminals X3M/3+4 to the bottom side of
terminals X8M/8+9 of control box EKCB07CAV3.
2
Connect the cable of the domestic hot water pump to the
bottom side of control box terminals X8M/8+9.
X2M
Notch this part for the wiring to pass through with nippers
etc.
Secure the wiring to the front part of the casing using the
wiring retainer and clamp.
89
X3M
To connect the shut-off valve
X8M
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
X5M
3 4
7.8.7
X5M
1 2
1×
NOTICE
Only connect NO (normal open) valves.
M2P
Installer reference guide
46
M
1~
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.8.9
To connect the electrical wiring on the
control box
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the control box.
2
Make sure the low voltage wiring is located on the right. Route it
through the intake hole and fasten it with cable ties.
X2M
23
22
3 4
X5M
c
a
b
c
b
a
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring
Main power supply
3
7.8.12
NOTICE
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
7.8.10
1
Tie the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
To connect the electrical wiring on the
option box
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the option box.
2
Make sure the low voltage wiring is located on the right. Route it
through the intake hole and fasten it with cable ties:
To connect the control box power supply
Connect the power supply cable to the control box.
X1M
X8M
123
123
1
2
3
2
GND
L
N
c
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with sharp edges.
a
b
c
b
a
Low voltage wiring
High voltage wiring
Main power supply
CAUTION
NOTICE
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
7.8.11
To connect the interconnection cable
between control box and outdoor unit
1
Connect X2M/22 (control box) to X5M/4 (outdoor unit).
2
Connect X2M/23 (control box) to X5M/3 (outdoor unit).
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
7.8.13
1
To connect the option box power supply
Connect option box terminal X1M to control box terminal X1M.
Installer reference guide
47
7 Installation
X2M
X2M
X2M
A4P
A4P
A4P
X1M
1 2 3
10
9
8
7
X1M
1 2 3
X8M
X8M
X1M
X8M
1
2
3
2
GND
L
N
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with sharp edges.
S5P S6P
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
To connect the interconnection cable
between option box and control box
7.8.14
1
2
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.16
INFORMATION
Connect the connectors from the accessory bag to X5A on A1P
of both the control box and the option box PCB.
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
Connect the connectors by way of a field-supplied cable.
a
b
a
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
1
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X2M
X5A
X5A
A4P
A4P
A4P
12
11
6
5
4
3
2
1
X1M
X8M
a
b
7.8.15
Connectors (accessory)
Interconnection cable (field supply)
To connect the electrical meters
S3P S2P S1P S4P
S3P
S2P
S1P
S4P
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
INFORMATION
2
1
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
48
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.17
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X2M/7 and X2M/9; the negative polarity to X2M/8 and
X2M/10.
Connect to terminals X2M/1+2
Connect to terminals X2M/3+4
Connect to terminals X2M/5+6
Connect to terminals X2M/11+12
To connect the alarm output
INFORMATION
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
1
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
X2M
A4P
7.8.20
15
13
To connect the electrical wiring on the
backup heater
Routing
Cables
a
Interconnection cable (backup heater thermistor +
backup heater thermal protector + backup heater
connection)
Low voltage
b
Main power supply
High
voltage
X1M
X8M
1
Insert the wiring from the bottom of the backup heater.
2
Inside the backup heater, route the wiring as follows:
Backup heater
type
Routing
*3V
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.18
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/
OFF output
a
b
INFORMATION
a Low voltage wiring
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
1
b High voltage wiring
*9W
Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
12
X8M
a
b
a Low voltage wiring
b High voltage wiring
3
Fix the wiring with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
NOTICE
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.8.19
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
INFORMATION
1
The distance between the high voltage and low voltage
cables should be at least 25 mm.
7.8.21
To connect the backup heater power
supply
▪ Requires option box EK2CB07CAV3.
CAUTION
▪ To be connected to option box EK2CB07CAV3.
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X1M
34
CAUTION
If a tank with a built‑in electrical booster heater (EKHW) is
part of the system, use a dedicated power circuit for the
backup heater and booster heater. NEVER use a power
circuit shared by another appliance. This power circuit
must be protected with the required safety devices
according to the applicable legislation.
X8M
Depending on the model, the backup heater capacity can vary. Make
sure that the power supply is in accordance with the backup heater
capacity, as listed in the table below.
LN
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
49
7 Installation
Backup
heater type
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax(Ω)
*3V
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
*9W
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
6 kW
1~ 230 V
26 A(a)(b)
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
8.6 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
(a)
(b)
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
1
Connect the backup heater power supply. For *3V models, a
double‑pole fuse is used for F1B. For *9W models, a 4‑pole
fuse is used for F1B.
2
If required, modify the connection on terminal X14M.
Backup heater
type
Special remark for terminals:
As mentioned on the table above, the connections on the terminals
X6M and X7M need to be changed to configure a backup heater.
Refer to the illustration below as a caution about handling the
terminals.
Connections to
terminals
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
—
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*3V)
F1B
3
L N
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
For more information on the backup heater types, and for
how to configure the backup heater, refer to the
"Configuration" chapter of the installation manual of the
outdoor unit.
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
6 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
6 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
F1B
L
X14M
1 2 3 4 5 6
N
F1B
X14M
1 2 3 4 5 6
During connection of the backup heater, miswiring is possible. To
detect possible miswiring on the *9W model, it is highly
recommended to measure the resistance value of the heater
elements. Depending on the different backup heater types, following
resistance values (see table below) should be measured. ALWAYS
measure the resistance on the contactor clamps K1M, K2M, and
K5M.
K1M/1
L1 L2 L3
K1M/3
K2M/1
Special remark for fuses:
3 kW
6 kW
6 kW
9 kW
1~ 230 V
1~ 230 V
3N~
400 V
3N~
400 V
K5M/13
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
∞
∞
K1M/3
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/5
∞
158.7Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/5
26.5Ω
52.9Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K5M/13
∞
26.5Ω
∞
∞
K2M/3
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/5
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/3
K2M/5
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K1M/5
K2M/1
∞
132.3Ω
∞
∞
Example measure resistance between K1M/1 and K5M/13:
Installer reference guide
50
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
7 Installation
Ω
Ω
K1M
K2M
1 3 5 13
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
2 4 6 14
1
Connect the connector that makes one end of the connector
cable (a) to X21A of outdoor unit PCB A1P and route it
according to the illustration below.
2
Using field wiring and the clamp terminal that makes the other
end of the connector cable (b), make a connection to control
box terminal X8M/10, and connect outdoor unit terminals
X3M/1+2 to control box terminals X8M/6+7.
K5M
1 3 5 13
X7M
2 4 6 14
7.8.22
a
X21A
To connect the backup heater kit to the
control box
X21A
INFORMATION
connected
to
control
box
1
For the thermistor, connect 2 wires between backup heater
terminals X15M/1+2 and control box terminals X2M/5+6.
2
For the thermal protector, connect 2 wires between backup
heater terminals X15M/3+4 and control box terminals
X2M/11+12.
3
For the connection with the control box, connect 3 wires
between backup heater terminals X15M/5+6+7 and control box
terminals X2M/13+14+15.
b
X2M
X5M
X4M
12
▪ Requires to be
EKCB07CAV3.
X3M
A4P
F1B
15
14
13
12
11
c
6
5
a
b
c
X1M
1234567
X15M
Connector – one end of connector cable
Clamp terminal – other end of connector cable
To control box
WARNING
Provide stress relief to the valve kit connector cable by
attaching it to the cable bundle. Put tie wraps on both sides
of the clamp terminal. Failure to follow this warning may
lead to short-circuit and fire.
X8M
3
Connect the 3‑way valve that is part of the valve kit to control
box terminals X8M/6+7+10.
NOTICE
4
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
When connecting multiple wires to the same terminal,
make sure they have the same thickness.
INFORMATION
▪ For details about the connections, refer to the wiring
diagram.
▪ Use a multi-core cable.
▪ For backup heater kit EKMBUHCA3V3, it is NOT
required to make a connection between backup heater
terminal X15M/6 and control box terminal X2M/14.
7.8.23
To connect the valve kit
INFORMATION
Only applicable to reversible systems (heating+cooling) in
which a backup heater is installed.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
51
8 Configuration
X2M
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
A1P
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
Why
X4M
X1M
X8M 6 7 10
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
How
You can configure the system using two different methods.
a
YNL
b
a
b
Y
N
L
7.9.1
Configuring via the
user interface
From outdoor unit
3‑way valve
To X8M/6
To X8M/7
To X8M/10
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
7.9
Description
Method
First time – Quick wizard. When you turn
ON the user interface for the first time (via
the indoor unit), a quick wizard starts to help
you configure the system.
Afterwards. If necessary, you can make
changes to the configuration afterwards.
Configuring via the
PC configurator
You can prepare the configuration off-site on
PC and afterwards upload the configuration
to the system with the PC configurator.
See also: "8.1.1 To connect the PC cable to
the switch box" on page 52.
To close the outdoor unit
1
Close the switch box cover.
INFORMATION
2
Mount the top plate and the front plate.
When the installer settings are changed, the user interface
will request to confirm. When confirmed, the screen will
shortly turn OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several
seconds.
NOTICE
When closing the outdoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
7.10
Finishing the control box
installation
7.10.1
To close the control box
1
Close the front plate.
7.11
7.11.1
Finishing the option box
installation
To close the option box
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
Method
Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure.
#
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview settings.
Code
See also:
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 53
▪ "8.5 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 79
1
Close the front plate.
8.1.1
7.12
7.12.1
Finishing the backup heater
installation
To close the backup heater
1
Close the switch box cover.
2
Close the front plate.
Installer reference guide
52
To connect the PC cable to the switch box
Prerequisite: The EKPCCAB kit is required.
1
Connect the cable with USB connection to your PC.
2
Connect the plug of the cable to X10A on A1P of the switch box
of the outdoor unit, or to X12A on A4P of the switch box of
control box EKCB07CAV3.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
A
B
A1P
A4P
X10A
Result: The user permission level switches to Adv. end user.
Additional information is displayed and "+" is added to the menu title.
The user permission level will stay in Adv. end user until set
otherwise.
To set the user permission level to End user
X12A
1
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to End user. The user
interface will return to the default home screen.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
1
Go to [A.8]:
2
Go to the corresponding screen of the first part of the setting by
and
button.
using the
INFORMATION
An additional 0-digit is added to the first part of the setting
when you access the codes in the overview settings.
A
B
Overview settings
Pay special attention to the position of the plug!
H JST
3
Example: [1‑01]: "1" will result in "01".
Outdoor unit switch box
Control box switch box
2
01
00 00 01 15 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
Confirm
3
4
3
5
Adjust
Scroll
Go to the corresponding second part of the setting by using the
and
button.
Overview settings
01
00 00 01 15 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
Result: The value to be modified is now highlighted.
NOTICE
Another cable is already connected to X10A. To connect
the PC cable to X10A, therefore temporarily disconnect
this other cable. Do NOT forget to reconnect it afterwards.
8.1.2
To access the most used commands
To access the installer settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A]:
> Installer settings.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A.8]:
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
To set the user permission level to Installer
1
Set the user permission level to Adv. end user.
2
Go to [6.4]:
3
Press
4
4
Modify the value by using the
Repeat previous steps if you have to modify other settings.
6
Push
7
At installer settings menu, press
1
Go to the main menu or any of its submenus:
2
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
.
to confirm the modification of the parameter.
to confirm the settings.
Installer settings
The system will restart.
OK
Confirm
To set the user permission level to Advanced end user
Scroll
Adjust
5
for more than 4 seconds.
If you do NOT press any button for more than 1 hour or press
again for more than 4 seconds, the installer permission level
switches back to End user.
button.
01
00 00 01 20 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
> Information > User permission level.
is displayed on the home pages.
and
Overview settings
Confirm
To access the overview settings
Result:
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
Cancel
Adjust
Result: The system will restart.
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first
to the second user interface
If a second user interface is connected, the installer must first
proceed below instructions for the proper configuration of the 2 user
interfaces.
Installer reference guide
53
8 Configuration
This procedure offers you also the possibility to copy the language
set from one user interface to the other one: e.g. from EKRUCBL2 to
EKRUCBL1.
1
When power is turned on for the first time, both user interfaces
display:
Tue 15:10
U5:Auto address
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to
the second user interface
See "8.1.3 To copy the system settings from the first to the second
user interface" on page 53.
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after
first power ON
After first power ON of the system, you are guided on the user
interface to do initial settings:
▪ language,
Push 4 sec. to continue
▪ date,
2
Push
for 4 seconds on the user interface on which you want
to proceed to the quick wizard. This user interface is now the
main user interface.
▪ time,
▪ system layout.
By confirming the system layout, you can proceed with the
installation and commissioning of the system.
INFORMATION
During the quick wizard, the second user interface displays
Busy and will NOT be possible to operate.
3
The quick wizard will guide you.
4
For proper operation of the system, the local data on the two
user interfaces must be the same. If this is NOT the case, both
user interfaces will display:
1
Language
Select the desired language
Synchronization
Data difference detected.
Please select action:
Send data
Adjust
Confirm
5
Confirm
2
Tue 1 Jan 2013
Confirm
The user interface requests confirmation if you are sure to
proceed.
OK
Confirm
Confirm the selection on the screen by pushing
and all data
(languages, schedules etc.) will be synchronised from the
selected source user interface to the other one.
Confirm
▪ The copy operation can take up until 90 minutes.
▪ It is recommended to change installer settings, or the
configuration of the unit, on the main user interface. If
not, it can take up to 5 minutes before these changes
are visible in the menu structure.
4
1
Scroll
After configuration, select Confirm layout and press
.
Confirm layout
Please confirm the system
layout. The system will
restart and will be ready for
first startup.
OK
Confirm
5
54
Set the system layout settings: Standard, Options, Capacities.
For more details, see "8.2 Basic configuration" on page 55.
Select
Your system is now set to be operated by the 2 user interfaces.
Installer reference guide
Scroll
Adjust
A.2
System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
INFORMATION
▪ During the copying, both controllers will NOT allow
operation.
Scroll
00 : 00
Cancel
Adjust
Adjust
Time
What is the current time?
3
8
Set the current date and time.
Date
What is the date today?
Start copy
Are you sure you want to
start the copy operation?
7
Adjust
Select the required action:
▪ Send data: the user interface you are operating contains the
correct data and the data on the other user interface will be
overwritten.
▪ Receive data: the user interface you are operating does
NOT contain the correct data and the data on the other user
interface will be used to overwrite.
6
At power ON, the quick wizard starts as long as the system
layout was NOT confirmed yet, by setting the language.
Cancel
Adjust
The user interface re-initialises and you can proceed the
installation by setting the other applicable settings and
commissioning of the system.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
When the installer settings are changed, the system will request to
confirm. When confirmation is complete, the screen will shortly turn
OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several seconds.
8.2
Basic configuration
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date
#
Code
Code
[7-02]
N/A
Language
[1]
N/A
Time and date
Description
<< continuation
▪ 1 (2 LWT zones): 2 leaving water
temperature zones. The zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature (in
heating) is called the main leaving
water temperature zone. The zone
with the highest leaving water
temperature (in heating) is called the
additional leaving water temperature
zone. In practice, the main leaving
water temperature zone consists of
the higher load heat emitters and a
mixing station is installed to achieve
the desired leaving water temperature.
Description
[A.1]
8.2.2
#
[A.2.1.8]
Quick wizard: Standard
Space heating/cooling settings
a
The system can heat up or cool down a space. Depending on the
type of application, the space heating/cooling settings must be made
accordingly.
#
[A.2.1.7]
Code
[C-07]
b
Description
Unit control method:
▪ 0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving water
temperature regardless the actual
room temperature and/or heating or
cooling demand of the room.
▪ 1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation is
decided by the external thermostat or
equivalent (e.g. heat pump convector).
▪ 2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
#
[A.2.1.8]
Code
[7-02]
Description
The system can supply leaving water to
up to 2 water temperature zones. During
configuration, the number of water zones
must be set.
Number of LWT zones:
▪ 0 (1 LWT zone)(default): Only 1
leaving water temperature zone. This
zone is called the main leaving water
temperature zone.
▪ a: Add LWT zone
▪ b: Main LWT zone
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
Description
When the space heating/cooling control
is OFF by the user interface, the pump is
always OFF. When the space heating/
cooling control is On, you can select the
desired pump operation mode (only
applicable during space heating/cooling)
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 (Continuous): Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b
c
b
c
d
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
a
▪ d: Pump operation
continued >>
▪ a: Main LWT zone
continued >>
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
55
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
#
Description
[A.2.1.B]
<< continuation
Code
N/A
▪ 1 (Sample): The pump is ON when
there is heating or cooling demand as
the leaving water temperature has not
reached the desired temperature yet.
When thermo OFF condition occurs,
the pump runs every 5 minutes to
check the water temperature and
demand heating or cooling if
necessary. Remark: Sample is NOT
available in external room thermostat
control or room thermostat control.
a
c
b
e
d
g
b
a
f
▪ b: In room as room thermostat
User interface location:
c
▪ At unit: the other user interface is
automatically set to In room and if RT
control is selected act as room
thermostat.
▪ b: OFF
▪ In room (default): the other user
interface is automatically set to At unit
and if RT control is selected to act as
room thermostat.
▪ c: On
▪ d: LWT temperature
▪ e: Actual
[A.2.1.C]
▪ f: Desired
[E-0D]
continued >>
[A.2.1.9]
[F-0D]
▪ 1 (Yes): Glycol was added to the water
circuit to protect it against freezing.
Description
<< continuation
▪ 2 (Request)(default): Pump operation
based on request. Example: Using a
room thermostat creates thermo ON/
OFF condition. When there is no such
demand, the pump is OFF. Remark:
Request is NOT available in leaving
water temperature control.
a
b
c
d
e
b
c
Glycol present:
▪ 0 (No) (default): No glycol was added
to the water circuit.
▪ g: Pump operation
Code
b
▪ a: At unit
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
#
Description
Only if there are 2 user interfaces (1
installed in the room, 1 installed at the
indoor unit):
b
c
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options
External domestic hot water pump
This chapter only applies to systems with a domestic hot water tank
installed. A domestic hot water tank is available as an option.
Following settings must be made accordingly.
#
[A.2.2.A]
Code
[D-02]
Description
The outdoor unit offers the possibility to
connect a field supplied domestic hot
water pump (On/OFF type). Depending
on the installation and configuration on
the user interface, we distinguish its
functionality.
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
DHW pump:
▪ b: OFF
▪ 1 (Secondary rtrn): Installed for instant
hot water when water is tapped. The
end-user sets the operation timing
(weekly schedule time) of the
domestic hot water pump when it
should run. Control of this pump is
possible through the outdoor unit.
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by ext RT or
RT)
▪ e: Pump operation
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 2 (Disinf. shunt): Installed for
disinfection. It runs when the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
See also illustrations below.
Installer reference guide
56
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
Instant hot water
Code
[5-0D]
b
b
c
a
a
f
g
Description
BUH type:
▪ 1 (1P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 1~ 230 V
(default)
h
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
[A.2.2.E.2]
Disinfection
▪ 4 (3PN,(1/2)): 6 kW 3N~ 400 V (*9W)
c
d
f
e
g
▪ 5 (3PN,(1/1+2)): 9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
The system allows for the connection of 2 types of backup heater
kits:
▪ EKMBUHCA3V3: 1~ 230 V - 3 kW backup heater
Outdoor unit
Tank
Domestic hot water pump
Heater element
Non‑return valve
Shower
Cold water
Control box
▪ EKMBUHCA9W1: Unified backup heater
Backup heater EKMBUHCA3V3 can only be configured to be a 3V3
backup heater. Unified backup heater EKMBUHCA9W1 can be
configured in 4 ways:
▪ 3V3: 1~ 230 V, 1 step of 3 kW
INFORMATION
▪ 6V3: 1~ 230 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+3 kW
The correct domestic hot water default settings becomes
only applicable when domestic hot water operation is
activated ([E‑05]=1).
▪ 6W1: 3N~ 400 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+3 kW
▪ 9W1: 3N~ 400 V, 1st step = 3 kW, 2nd step = 3+6 kW
To configure the backup heater (both EKMBUHCA3V3 and
EKMBUHCA9W1), combine settings [E‑03] and [5‑0D]:
Remote outdoor sensor
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 14.
#
Description
Code
[A.2.2.B]
[C-08]
Backup heater
configuration
[E-03]
[5-0D]
External sensor (outdoor):
3V3
1
1 (1P,(1/1+2))
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 14.
6V3
2
1 (1P,(1/1+2))
6W1
2
4 (3PN,(1/2))
9W1
2
5 (3PN,(1/1+2))
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the outdoor unit are used for
measurement.
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Remote outdoor
sensor, connected to the outdoor unit.
The outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
#
[A.2.2.E.4]
Code
[E-05]
Description
DHW operation:
Can the system prepare domestic hot
water?
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed. (Default)
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed
▪ 2 (Room sensor): Remote indoor
sensor, connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. The temperature
sensor in the user interface is NOT
used anymore. Remark: This value
has only meaning in room thermostat
control.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
Control box EKCB07CAV3
Modification of these settings is only required when optional control
box EKCB07CAV3 is installed. Control box EKCB07CAV3 has
multiple functionalities which need to be configured. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 14.
#
[A.2.2.E.1]
Code
[E‑03]
Description
Backup heater steps:
▪ 0 (default)
▪ 1
▪ 2
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
57
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.2.E.5]
Code
[C-05]
Description
Contact type main
#
Code
[A.2.2.F.2]
[C-09]
In external room thermostat control, the
contact type of the optional room
thermostat or heat pump convector for
the main leaving water temperature zone
must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 14.
Indicates the logic of the alarm output on
option box EK2CB07CAV3 during a
malfunction.
▪ 0 (Normally open)(default): The alarm
output will be powered when an alarm
occurs. By setting this value, a
distinction
is
made
between
malfunctioning and detection of a
power failure of the unit.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF) (default): The
connected external room thermostat or
heat pump convector sends the
heating or cooling demand by the
same signal as it is connected to only
1 digital input (preserved for the main
leaving water temperature zone) on
the control box (X2M/1). Select this
value in case of a connection to the
heat pump convector (FWXV).
▪ 2 (H/C request): The connected
external room thermostat sends
separate heating and cooling demand
and is therefore connected to the 2
digital input (preserved for the main
leaving water temperature zone) on
the control box (X2M/1 and 1a). Select
this value in case of connection with
the wired (EKRTWA) or wireless
(EKRTR1) room thermostat.
If there are two zones (main+additional),
then only Thermo ON/OFF is possible.
[A.2.2.E.6]
[C-06]
▪ 1 (Normally closed): The alarm output
will NOT be powered when an alarm
occurs. This installer setting allows for
a distinction between the detection of
an alarm, and the detection of a power
failure.
Also see the table below (Alarm output
logic).
[A.2.2.F.3]
[D-08]
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
[A.2.2.F.4]
[D-09]
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
#
Code
[A.2.2.F.5]
[C-08]
Option box EK2CB07CAV3
▪ 0 (No): (default) NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the outdoor unit are used for
measurement.
Modification of these settings is only required when option box
EK2CB07CAV3 is installed. Option box EK2CB07CAV3 has multiple
functionalities which need to be configured. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 14.
Code
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Remote outdoor
sensor, connected to the outdoor unit.
The outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
Description
Ext. backup heat src
Indicates if the space heating is also
performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Bivalent): Installed. The auxiliary
boiler (gas boiler, oil burner) will
operate when the outdoor ambient
temperature is low. During bivalent
operation, the heat pump is turned
OFF. Set this value in case an
auxililary boiler is used. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 14.
▪ 2: N/A
▪ 3: N/A
Installer reference guide
58
Description
External sensor (indoor):
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 14.
If there are two zones (main+additional),
then only Thermo ON/OFF is possible.
[C-02]
Optional external kWh meter 2:
In external room thermostat control with
2 leaving water temperature zones, the
type of the optional room thermostat for
the additional leaving water temperature
zone must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 14.
▪ 2: N/A
[A.2.2.F.1]
Optional external kWh meter 1:
Contact type add.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a).
#
Description
Alarm output
▪ 2 (Room sensor): Remote indoor
sensor, connected to option box
EK2CB07CAV3. The temperature
sensor in the user interface is NOT
used anymore. Remark: This value
has only meaning in room thermostat
control.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.2.F.6]
Code
[D-04]
Description
PCC by digital inputs:
▪ 0 (No)
Leaving water temperature: Main zone
#
[A.3.1.1.1]
Code
N/A
▪ 1 (Yes)
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy
metering)
[A.2.3.1]
Code
[6-02]
[6-03]
▪ 1 (Weather dep.) (default): The
desired leaving water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
continued >>
#
[A.3.1.1.1]
Code
N/A
[6-04]
Description
<< continuation
▪ 2 (Fixed/scheduled): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
[A.2.3.3]
BUH: step 2: Only applies to a two-step
backup heater (*9W). The capacity
difference between the second and first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value depends on the
backup heater configuration. Default:
0 kW.
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired shift actions, either preset
or custom.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ 3 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 0 kW
▪ 6 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 3 (WD/scheduled): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
▪ 6 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ 9 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 6 kW (9 kW-3 kW)
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
8.2.5
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired
leaving
water
temperatures either preset or
custom.
Space heating/cooling control
The basic required settings in order to configure the space heating/
cooling of your system are described in this chapter. The weatherdependent installer settings define the parameters for the weatherdependent operation of the unit. When weather-dependent operation
is active, the water temperature is determined automatically
depending on the outdoor temperature. Low outdoor temperatures
will result in warmer water and vice versa. During weatherdependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift up or down
the target water temperature by a maximum of 5°C.
See the user reference guide and/or operation manual for more
details about this function.
water
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
Booster heater: Only applies to domestic
hot water tanks with an internal booster
heater (EKHW). The capacity of the
booster heater at nominal voltage.
Nominal value is 3 kW. Default: 3 kW.
BUH: step 1: The capacity of the first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value 3 kW. Default:
3 kW.
leaving
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
Description
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
[A.2.3.2]
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ 0 (Fixed)
The
desired
temperature is:
The capacities of all electrical heaters must be set for the energy
metering and/or power consumption control feature to work properly.
When measuring the resistance value of each heater, you can set
the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more accurate energy
data.
#
Description
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
#
[7.7.1.1]
Code
[1-00]
[1-01]
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
[1-02]
[1-03]
[1-02]
[1-03]
[1-00]
[1-01]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
59
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.1.1]
Code
#
Description
[7.7.1.2]
[1-00]
<< continuation
[1-01]
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. –40°C~+5°C (default: –
10°C)
[1-02]
[1-03]
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-03] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-02] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
#
[7.7.1.2]
Description
Code
[1-06]
[1-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
Description
<< continuation
[1-07]
▪ [1-06]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-07]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[1‑08]
[1-09]
▪ [1-08]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 22°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-09] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [1-09]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-08] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Leaving water temperature: Additional zone
[1‑08]
[1-09]
Code
[1-06]
Only applicable if 2 leaving water temperature zones are present.
[1-08]
[1-09]
[1-06]
[1-07]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
Installer reference guide
60
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.3.1.2.1]
Code
N/A
#
Description
[7.7.2.1]
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed: The desired leaving water
temperature is:
Code
<< continuation
[0-01]
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. –40°C~+5°C (default: –
10°C)
[0-02]
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
[0-03]
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
#
[7.7.2.2]
Description
Code
[0-04]
[0-05]
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
[0-06]
[0-07]
[0-05]
[0-04]
[0-07]
#
[7.7.2.1]
Code
[0-00]
[0-01]
[0-06]
Description
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
[0-02]
[0-03]
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑05]°C~min(45, [9‑06])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0-01] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0-00] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ Weather dep. (default): The desired
leaving water temperature is:
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
Description
[0-00]
continued >>
[0-01]
[0-00]
[0-03]
[0-02]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
61
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.2.2]
Code
Description
[0-04]
<< continuation
[0-05]
▪ [0-07]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-06]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[0-06]
[0-07]
▪ [0-05]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 12°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑04] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures exactly
temperature (higher comfort level)
[A.3.1.3.1]
Code
[9-09]
#
Code
[A.3.1.1.5]
[8-05]
▪ 1 (Yes)(default): enabled. The
leaving
water
temperature
is
calculated according to the difference
between the desired and the actual
room temperature. This creates a
better match between the capacity of
the heat pump and the actual
required capacity, and results in less
start/stop cycles and a more
economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface
N/A
[8-06]
Requires modulation to be enabled.
This is the value by which the desired
leaving water temperature is increased
or lowered.
Description
Heating: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water.
Cooling: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water.
In case a minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of the heat emitters in cooling
mode.
INFORMATION
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
Tt
+[8-06]
−[8-06]
a
Range: 3°C~10°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 5°C).
b
Ta
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
Installer reference guide
62
Leaving water temperature maximum
modulation:
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Range: 3°C~10°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 5°C).
[9-0A]
Description
Modulated LWT:
▪ 0 (No): disabled.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature needs to be set on the
user interface.
In case a minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of the heat emitters in heating
mode.
[A.3.1.3.2]
desired
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
Leaving water temperature: Delta T source
#
the
▪ less On/OFF cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ [0-04]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
Between minimum and maximum
leaving
water
temperature
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 8°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0‑05] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Temperature difference for entering and leaving water. The unit is
designed to support under floor loops operation. The recommended
leaving water temperature (set by the user interface) for under floor
loops is 35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the entering water
to the unit is around 30°C. Depending on the installed application
(radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or situation, it
can be possible to change the difference between entering and
leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will regulate its flow
to keep the Δt.
matching
a
b
Weather-dependent curve
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
Leaving water temperature: Emitter type
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. Depending on
the system water volume and the heat emitters type, the heat up or
cool down of a space can take longer. This setting can compensate
for a slow or a quick heating/cooling system during the heat up/cool
down cycle.
#
Code
[A.4.5]
[6-0E]
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
Note: The setting of the emitter type will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature and the
possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating changeover
based on the indoor ambient temperature.
Range: 40°C~80°C (in steps of 1°C;
default value: 60°C).
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly.
#
[A.3.1.1.7]
Code
[9-0B]
Description
8.2.7
Emitter type:
Reaction time of the system:
▪ Quick Example: Small water volume
and fan coils.
▪ Slow Example: Large water volume,
floor heating loops.
8.2.6
Configuring the desired tank temperature
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
#
Contact/helpdesk number
#
Code
[6.3.2]
N/A
Code
[6-0D]
Description
Domestic hot water Type:
▪ 0 (Reheat only): Only reheat operation
is allowed.
▪ 1 (Reheat + sched.): The domestic hot
water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heatup cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation:
advanced
Preset leaving water temperature
You can define preset leaving water temperatures:
▪ economic (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the lowest energy consumption)
▪ comfort (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the highest energy consumption).
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule or
to adjust the desired leaving water temperature according to the
room temperature (see modulation). If you later want to change the
value, you ONLY have to do it in one place. Depending on whether
the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent or NOT,
the desired shift values or the absolute desired leaving water
temperature should be specified.
NOTICE
The preset leaving water temperatures are ONLY
applicable for the main zone, as the schedule for the
additional zone consists of On/OFF actions.
See "8.3.2 Domestic hot water control: advanced" on page 67 for
more details.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
Advanced configuration/
optimization
▪ 2 (Scheduled only): The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
There is a risk of space heating (cooling) capacity
shortage/comfort problem (in case of frequent domestic hot
water operation, frequent and long space heating/cooling
interruption will happen) when selecting [6‑0D]=0 ([A.4.1]
Domestic hot water Type=Reheat only) in case of a
domestic hot water tank without an internal booster heater.
Select preset leaving water temperatures in accordance
with the design and selected heat emitters to ensure the
balance between desired room and leaving water
temperatures.
#
Code
[8-09]
[7.4.2.2]
[8-0A]
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
[7.4.2.3]
[8-07]
INFORMATION
[7.4.2.4]
[8-08]
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Comfort (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 45°C)
INFORMATION
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
Description
Preset leaving water temperature for the main leaving water
temperature zone in case of NOT weather dependent
[7.4.2.1]
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
Description
8.3
Domestic hot water control
Only applicable in case an optional domestic hot water tank is
installed.
[A.4.1]
Description
Maximum setpoint
Eco (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 40°C)
Comfort (cooling)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C)
Eco (cooling)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 20°C)
Preset leaving water temperature (shift value) for the main leaving
water temperature zone in case of weather dependent
Installer reference guide
63
8 Configuration
#
Code
[7.4.2.5]
N/A
Description
Comfort (heating)
#
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.2.4] [9-02]
Maximum temp (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
[7.4.2.6]
N/A
Eco (heating)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.3] [9-03]
Minimum temp (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: –2°C)
[7.4.2.7]
N/A
[7.4.2.8]
N/A
Comfort (cooling)
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Eco (cooling)
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
lowest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 2°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.2] [9-06]
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~55°C (default: 55°C)
Temperature ranges (leaving water temperatures)
The purpose of this setting is to prevent selecting a wrong (i.e. too
hot or too cold) leaving water temperature. Therefore the available
desired heating temperature range and desired cooling temperature
range can be configured.
Minimum temp (heating)
[A.3.1.2.2.1] [9-05]
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.4] [9-08]
Maximum temp (cooling)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
NOTICE
Minimum temp (cooling)
[A.3.1.2.2.3] [9-07]
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling
operation to 18~20°C to prevent condensation on the
floor.
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will startup again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
NOTICE
Code
N/A
Description
[9-04]
1°C~4°C (default: 1°C)
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
Tt
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures MUST be sufficiently higher than the room
temperatures (in heating).
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased around an outdoor temperature of 0°C. This
compensation can be selected when using an absolute or a weather
dependent desired temperature (see illustration below). Use this
setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the building due to
the evaporation of melted ice or snow (e.g. in cold region countries).
Tt
L
L
R
R
0°C
TA
0°C
a
b
a
b
#
N/A
TA
Absolute desired LWT
Weather dependent desired LWT
Code
[D-03]
Description
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C)
▪ 2 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C) (default)
▪ 3 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
#
Code
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
highest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
[A.3.1.1.2.2] [9-00]
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~55°C (default: 55°C)
[A.3.1.1.2.1] [9-01]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
Installer reference guide
64
▪ 4 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when modulation is
enabled. The maximum modulation (=variance) on the desired
leaving water temperature decided on the difference between the
actual and desired room temperature, e.g. 3°C modulation means
the desired leaving water temperature can be increased or lowered
by 3°C. Increasing the modulation results in better performance (less
On/OFF, faster heat up), but note that depending on the heat
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
emitter, there MUST ALWAYS be a balance (refer to the design and
selection of the heat emitters) between the desired leaving water
temperature and the desired room temperature.
Description
Code
#
N/A
[8-06]
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Room temperature hysteresis
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. The hysteresis
band around the desired room temperature is settable. It is
recommended NOT to change the room temperature hysteresis as it
is set for an optimal use of the system.
a
Weather dependent cooling allowance
ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3. It is possible to disable
weather dependent cooling, meaning the desired leaving water
temperature in cooling operation does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature and this regardless whether weather
dependent is selected or NOT. Both for the main leaving water
temperature zone as for the additional leaving water temperature
zone, this can be set separately.
N/A
[1-04]
Weather dependent cooling of the main
leaving water temperature zone is…
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
N/A
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the
additional leaving water temperature
zone is…
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
Temperature ranges (room temperature)
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control. In order to save energy
by preventing overheating or undercooling the room, you can limit
the range of the room temperature, both for heating and/or cooling.
NOTICE
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired
room temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are
between the limits.
#
Code
Description
Room temp. range
[A.3.2.1.2]
[3-06]
Maximum temp (heating)
18°C~30°C (default: 30°C)
[A.3.2.1.1]
[3-07]
d
a
b
c
d
Minimum temp (heating)
Room temperature
Actual room temperature
Desired room temperature
Time
Description
Code
#
Description
Code
#
b
c
[9-0C]
[9-0C]
N/A
1°C~6°C (default: 1°C)
Room temperature offset
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor. It is possible to
give an offset to the room thermistor value measured by the user
interface or by the external room sensor. The settings can be used
to compensate for situations where the user interface or external
room sensor CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation manual and/or installer reference guide).
Code
#
Description
Room temp. offset: Offset on the actual room temperature
measured on the user interface sensor.
[A.3.2.2]
[2-0A]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Ext. room sensor offset: ONLY applicable if the external room
sensor option is installed and configured (see [C-08])
[A.3.2.3]
[2-09]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Room frost protection
Room frost protection prevents the room from getting too cold. This
setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control method
([C‑07]). Perform actions according to the table below:
Unit control method ([C‑07])
Room thermostat control
([C‑07]=2)
12°C~18°C (default: 16°C)
[A.3.2.1.4]
[3-08]
▪ Set [2‑06] to "1"
Maximum temp (cooling)
▪ Set
the
room
temperature ([2‑05]).
25°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
[A.3.2.1.3]
[3-09]
Minimum temp (cooling)
15°C~25°C (default: 15°C)
#
[A.3.2.4]
Code
N/A
Description
antifrost
External room thermostat control Allow for the external room
([C‑07]=1)
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
Room temperature step
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when the
temperature is displayed in °C.
Room frost protection
Allow for the room thermostat to
take care of room frost
protection:
▪ Turn ON the leaving water
temperature home page.
Leaving water temperature
control ([C‑07]=0)
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Room temp. step
NOTICE
▪ 1°C (default). The desired room
temperature on the user interface is
settable per 1°C.
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, do NOT
change the default room antifrost temperature.
▪ 0.5°C. The desired room temperature
on the user interface is settable per
0.5°C. The actual room temperature is
displayed with an accuracy of 0.1°C.
INFORMATION
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Refer to the sections below for detailed information on room frost
protection in relation to the applicable unit control method.
[C‑07]=2: room thermostat control
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
65
8 Configuration
Under room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed,
even if the room temperature home page is OFF on the user
interface. When room frost protection ([2‑06]) is enabled and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature
([2‑05]), the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat
up the room again.
#
N/A
Code
[2-06]
In case of…
Description
Room frost protection
▪ 0: disabled
▪ 1: enabled (default)
N/A
[2-05]
4°C~16°C (default: 16°C)
INFORMATION
If a U5 error occurs:
▪ when 1 user interface is connected, room frost
protection is NOT guaranteed,
▪ when 2 user interfaces are connected and the second
user interface used for room temperature control is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable),
then room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
▪ The selection of "cooling" or
"heating" is done via the user
interface. When the leaving
water temperature home page
is ON and the operation mode
is "cooling", then there is no
protection.
NOTICE
[C‑07]=1: external room thermostat control
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that the
leaving water temperature home page is ON on the user interface,
and the auto emergency setting ([A.6.C]) is set to "1".
Additionally, limited frost protection by the unit is possible:
In case of…
One leaving water temperature
zone
…then the following applies:
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the external room thermostat
is "Thermo OFF" and the
outdoor ambient temperature
drops below 4°C, then the unit
will supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON
and
the
external
room
thermostat is "Thermo ON",
then room frost protection is
guaranteed by the normal
logic.
Installer reference guide
66
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF, and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the
operation
mode
is
"heating", and the outdoor
ambient temperature drops
below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Room antifrost temperature
If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the user interface
will ask confirmation before starting. Room frost protection
is active even if the user does NOT confirm emergency
operation.
…then the following applies:
Two leaving water temperature
zones
[C‑07]=0: leaving water temperature control
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if [2‑06] is set to "1", limited frost
protection by the unit is possible:
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is OFF and the
outdoor ambient temperature drops below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water temperature setpoint will be lowered.
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "heating", then the unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up the room according to normal logic.
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "cooling", then there is no protection.
Shut-off valve
The shut-off valve is in the main leaving water temperature zone,
and is connected to the heating/cooling output.
NOTICE
The output of the shut‑off valve is NOT configurable. Do
NOT change the value of setting [F‑0B]. Only connect NO
(normal open) shut‑off valves.
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating or space cooling is prohibited.
Space heating OFF temp: When the averaged outdoor temperature
rises above this value, space heating is turned OFF to avoid
overheating.
#
[A.3.3.1]
Code
[4-02]
Description
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
Space cooling On temp: ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3.
When the averaged outdoor temperature drops below this value,
space cooling is turned OFF.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.3.3.2]
Code
[F-01]
Description
10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
#
Code
N/A
[4-0B]
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
Automatic heating/cooling changeover
ONLY applicable for EBLQ05+07CAV3. The end-user sets the
desired operation mode on the user interface: Heating, Cooling or
Automatic (see also operation manual/user reference guide). When
Automatic is selected, the changing of the operation mode is based
on:
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
1°C)
N/A
[4-0D]
▪ Monthly allowance for heating and/or cooling: the end-user
indicates on a monthly base which operation is allowed ([7.5]: both
heating/cooling or heating ONLY or cooling ONLY). If the allowed
operation mode changes to cooling ONLY, the operation mode
changes to cooling. If the allowed operation mode changes to
heating ONLY, the operation mode changes to heating.
▪ Averaged outdoor temperature: the operation mode will be
changed in order to ALWAYS be within range determined by the
space heating OFF temperature for heating and the space cooling
On temperature for cooling. If the outdoor temperature drops, the
operation mode switches to heating and vice versa. Note that the
outdoor
temperature
will
be
time-averaged
(see
"8 Configuration" on page 52).
When the outdoor temperature is between the space cooling On and
the space heating OFF temperature, the operation mode remains
unchanged unless the system is configured in room thermostat
control with one leaving water temperature zone and quick heat
emitters. In that case, the operation mode will change based on:
Description
Hysteresis: Ensures that changeover is
ONLY done when necessary. Example:
The space operation mode ONLY
changes from cooling to heating when
the room temperature drops below the
desired heating temperature subtracted
by the hysteresis.
Offset: Ensures that the active desired
room temperature can be reached.
Example: if heating to cooling
changeover would occur below the
desired room temperature in heating, this
desired room temperature could never
be reached.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
3°C)
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced
Preset tank temperatures
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
or scheduled + reheat.
You can define preset tank temperatures:
▪ storage economic
▪ storage comfort
▪ Measured indoor temperature: besides the heating and the
cooling desired room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis
value (e.g. when in heating, this value is related to the desired
cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when in heating,
this value is related to the desired heating temperature). Example:
the desired room temperature in heating is 22°C and in cooling
24°C, with a hysteresis value of 1°C and an offset of 4°C.
Changeover from heating to cooling will occur when the room
temperature rises above the maximum of the desired cooling
temperature added by the hysteresis value (thus 25°C) and the
desired heating temperature added by the offset value (thus
26°C). Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will occur
when the room temperature drops below the minimum of the
desired heating temperature subtracted by the hysteresis value
(thus 21°C) and the desired cooling temperature subtracted by the
offset value (thus 20°C).
▪ reheat
▪ Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to
cooling and vice versa.
[7.4.3.1]
▪ reheat hysteresis
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule. If
you later want to change the value, you only have to do it in 1 place
(see also operation manual and/or user reference guide).
Storage comfort
When programming the schedule, you can make use of the tank
temperatures set as preset values. The tank will then heat up until
these setpoint temperatures have been reached. Additionally, a
storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a stop to tank
heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached. Only program a
storage stop when tank heating is absolutely undesirable.
#
Code
[6-0A]
Description
30°C~[6‑0E]°C (default: 55°C)
Storage eco
Changeover settings related to the outdoor temperature (ONLY
when automatic is selected):
#
[A.3.3.1]
Code
[4-02]
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired tank
temperature. It is the desired temperature when a storage economic
action is scheduled (preferably during day).
Description
Space heating OFF temp. If the outdoor
temperature rises above this value, the
operation mode will change to cooling:
#
[7.4.3.2]
Code
[6-0B]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat
Range: 14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
[A.3.3.2]
[F-01]
Space cooling On temp. If the outdoor
temperature drops below this value, the
operation mode will change to heating:
Range: 10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature. ONLY
applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured
in room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone
and quick heat emitters.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
The desired reheat tank temperature is used:
▪ in reheat mode of scheduled + reheat mode: The guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by THP OFF–[6‑08], which is either
[6‑0C] or the weather dependent setpoint, minus the reheat
hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value, the tank
is heated up.
#
[7.4.3.3]
Code
[6-0C]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Installer reference guide
67
8 Configuration
Reheat hysteresis
#
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled +
reheat.
#
N/A
Code
[6-08]
Description
2°C~20°C (default: 10°C)
[A.4.7]
Code
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
Description
Weather-dependent curve
TDHW
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
Weather dependent
The weather dependent installer settings define the parameters for
the weather dependent operation of the unit. When weather
dependent operation is active the desired tank temperature is
determined automatically depending on the averaged outdoor
temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher desired
tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice versa. In
case of scheduled or scheduled+reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent. In case of
reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired tank
temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the enduser cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface.
#
[A.4.6]
Code
N/A
Description
Weather dependent desired tank
temperature is:
▪ Fixed (default): disabled. All desired
tank temperature are NOT weather
dependent.
▪ Weather dep.: enabled. In scheduled
or scheduled+reheat mode, the
storage comfort temperature is
weather dependent. Storage economic
and reheat temperatures are NOT
weather dependent. In reheat mode,
the desired tank temperature is
weather dependent.
Note: When the displayed tank
temperature is weather dependent, it
cannot be adjusted on the user
interface.
Installer reference guide
68
[0-0B]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
Ta
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
ambient
temperature: –40°C~5°C (default: –
10°C)
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
temperature: 10°C~25°C
15°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops below the low ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
60°C)
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises above the high ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
55°C)
Booster heater and heat pump operation
For systems with a domestic hot water tank
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[4-03]
Description
#
Defines the operation permission of the
booster heater depending on ambient,
domestic hot water temperature or
operation mode of heat pump. This
setting is only applicable in reheat mode
for applications with a domestic hot water
tank.
N/A
Code
[4-03]
The booster heater will be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5-03] depends of the
status of [5-02].
If bivalent operation is enabled and
permission signal for auxiliary boiler is
ON, the booster heater will be restricted
even when Ta<[5-03]. See [C-02].
▪ 0: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed except for "Disinfection
function" and "Powerful domestic
water heating".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting [5-03] and [5-02]=1, the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
▪ 3 (default): The booster heater is
allowed when the heat pump is NOT
active in domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous
heat pump domestic hot water
operation
and
booster
heater
operation is not allowed.
▪ 4: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed except for "Disinfection
function".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting [5-03] and [5-02]=1, the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
▪ 1: Booster heater operation is allowed
when required.
▪ 2: The booster heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat
pump for domestic hot water
operation.
Booster heater operation is only
allowed if:
▪ Ambient temperature is out of the
operating range: Ta<[5-03] or
Ta>35°C
▪ Domestic hot water temperature is
2°C lower than the heat pump OFF
temperature.
Description
<< continuation
When setting [4-03]=1/2/3/4, the booster
heater operation can still be restricted by
the booster heater allowance schedule.
N/A
[7-00]
continued >>
Overshoot temperature. Temperature
difference above the domestic hot water
set point temperature before the booster
heater is turned OFF. The domestic hot
water tank temperature will increase with
[7-00] above selected temperature
set point.
Range: 0°C~4°C (default: 0°C)
N/A
[7-01]
N/A
[6-00]
N/A
[6-01]
Hysteresis. Temperature difference
between booster heater ON and booster
heater OFF temperature. The minimum
hysteresis temperature is 2°C.
Range: 2°C~40°C (default: 2°C)
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump ON temperature.
Range: 2°C~20°C (default: 2°C)
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
Range: 0°C~10°C (default: 2°C)
Example: setpoint (TU)>maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
69
8 Configuration
TDHW
#
[7-01]
[7-00]
TBH OFF 73
TBH ON 71
TU 70
N/A
Code
[8-01]
60
THP MAX 50
THP OFF 48
[6-01]
[6-00]
THP ON 41
40
▪ When system layout = Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
only taken into account if there is a
request for space heating or cooling. If
there is NO request for space heating/
cooling, the tank is heated until the
setpoint has been reached.
30
20
HP
10
BH
TU
[7-00]
[6-01]
[6-00]
= 70°C
= 3°C
= 2°C
= 7°C
HP
5
▪ When system layout ≠ Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
always taken into account.
t
BH
HP
TBH OFF
TBH ON
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Booster heater
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
Booster heater OFF temperature (TU+[7-00])
Booster heater ON temperature (TBH OFF−[7-01])
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
Range: 5~95 minutes (default: 30)
N/A
[8-02]
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 3) (step: 0.5
hour).
Remark: The minimum time is 1/2 hour
even when the selected value is 0.
N/A
TDHW
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
Only for EKHW
THP MAX 50
TU=THP OFF 45
THP ON 43
Start-up delay time for the booster heater
when domestic hot water mode is active.
[6-00]
40
▪ When domestic hot water mode is
NOT active, the delay time is
20 minutes.
30
20
▪ The delay time starts from booster
heater ON temperature.
HP
10
5
▪ By adapting the booster heater delay
time versus the maximum running
time, you can find an optimal balance
between the energy efficiency and the
heat up time.
t
HP
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
▪ If the booster heater delay time is set
too high, it might take a long time
before the domestic hot water reaches
its set temperature.
▪ The setting [8-03] is only meaningful if
setting [4-03]=1. Setting [4-03]=0/2/3/4
limits the booster heater automatically
in relation to heat pump operation time
in domestic water heating mode.
INFORMATION
The maximum heat pump temperature depends on the
ambient temperature. For more information, see the
operation range.
▪ Make sure that [8-03] is always in
relation with the maximum running
time [8-01].
Timers for simultaneous request space and domestic hot water
operation
N/A
Anti-recycling time.
Minimum time between two cycles for
domestic hot water. The actual antirecycling time also depends on setting
[8-04].
Example: setpoint (TU)≤maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
#
Description
Maximum running time for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
Code
[8-00]
Range: 20~95 (default: 50).
Description
Do not change. (default: 1)
N/A
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum
running time depending on the outdoor
temperature [4-02] or [F-01].
Range: 0~95 minutes (default: 95).
[8-02]: Anti-recycling time
Installer reference guide
70
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
1
Code
[A.4.4.2]
[2‑00]
Description
Operation day:
▪ 0: Each day
0
▪ 1: Monday
1
▪ 2: Tuesday
0
▪ 3: Wednesday
[8-00]
[8-01]
1
2
t
▪ 4: Thursday
t
[8-02]
▪ 5: Friday
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
▪ 6: Saturday
▪ 7: Sunday
[2‑01]
[A.4.4.1]
[8-03]: Booster heater delay timer
Disinfection
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
1
4
0
[A.4.4.3]
[2‑02]
Start time: 00~23:00, step: 1:00.
[A.4.4.4]
[2‑03]
Temperature target:
[A.4.4.5]
[2‑04]
1
Range: 55°C~80°C (default: 70°C).
3
0
Duration:
Range: 5~60 minutes (default: 10
minutes).
1
TDHW
0
[2-03]
1
[2-04]
TH
0
TU
t
[8-03]
1
2
3
4
t
Booster heater operation (1=active, 0=not active)
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for booster heater (1=request, 0=no
request)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
[8-04]: Additional running time at [4-02]/[F-01]
t
t
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-02]
[8-02]
[8-01]
[8-01]
0
[5-03]
TA
t
[4-02]
TA
0
00.00
01.00
22.00
23.00
24.00
t
[2-02]
TDHW
TU
TH
t
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature
High set point temperature [2-03]
Time
WARNING
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
[F-01]
35°C
TA
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
Time
Anti-recycle time
Maximum running time domestic hot water
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
Disinfection
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
CAUTION
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [A.4.4.3]
with defined duration [A.4.4.5] is NOT interrupted by
possible domestic hot water demand.
CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
71
8 Configuration
CAUTION
#
The booster heater permission schedule is used to restrict
or allow booster heater operation based on a weekly
program. Advice: In order to avoid unsuccessful
disinfection function, at least allow the booster heater (by
the weekly program) for minimum 4 hours starting from the
scheduled start-up of disinfection. If the booster heater is
restricted during disinfection, this function will NOT be
successful and the applicable warning AH will be
generated.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
INFORMATION
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
Code
[A.5.1.4]
[5‑01]
Description
Equilibrium temperature.
Outdoor temperature below which
operation of the backup heater is
allowed.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: –4°C)
(step: 1°C)
Auto emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate, the backup heater and booster
heater can serve as an emergency heater and either automatically
or non-automatically take over the heat load.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure
occurs:
▪ The backup heater will automatically take over the heat load.
▪ The booster heater will automatically take over the domestic hot
water production.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure
occurs, the domestic hot water and space heating operations will
stop and need to be recovered manually. The user interface will
then ask you to confirm whether the backup heater or booster
heater can take over the heat load or not.
When the heat pump fails, will appear on the user interface. If the
house is unattended for longer periods, we recommend to set
[A.6.C] Emergency to Automatic.
#
Code
[A.6.C]
N/A
Description
Emergency:
▪ 0: Manual (default)
INFORMATION
▪ 1: Automatic
An AH error occurs if you do the following during
disinfection:
▪ Set the user permission level to Installer.
▪ Go to the DHW tank temperature home page (Tank).
▪ Press
8.3.3
to interrupt the disinfection.
INFORMATION
If [4‑03]=1 or 3, then Emergency=Manual is not applicable
for the booster heater.
INFORMATION
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
Heat source settings
Backup heater
INFORMATION
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is enabled or disabled. This setting is only overruled when
backup heating is required during defrost operation or malfunctioning
of the outdoor unit (when [A.6.C] is enabled).
If a heat pump failure occurs and [A.6.C] is set to Manual,
the room frost protection function, the underfloor heating
screed dryout function, and the water pipe antifreeze
function will remain active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
#
[A.5.1.1]
Code
[4‑00]
Description
Backup heater operation:
Bivalent
▪ 0: Disabled
Applies only to installations with an auxiliary boiler (alternating
operation, parallel connected). The purpose of this function is to
determine — based on the outdoor temperature (possibility 1) or on
energy prices (possibility 2) — which heating source can/will provide
the space heating, either the outdoor unit or an auxiliary boiler.
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
[A.5.1.3]
[4‑07]
Defines whether backup heater second
step is:
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ 0: NOT allowed
N/A
[5-00]
In this way it is possible to limit the
backup heater capacity.
Possibility 1
Is backup heater operation allowed
above equilibrium temperature during
space heating operation?
The installer can set a temperature below which the boiler will
always operate when the electricity prices (High, Medium, Low) are
"0" in the menu structure.
▪ 1: NOT allowed
▪ 0: Allowed
Installer reference guide
72
The field setting "bivalent operation" applies only to the space
heating operation of the outdoor unit and the permission signal for
the auxiliary boiler.
NOTICE
Do NOT use overview settings!
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
When "bivalent operation" function is enabled, the outdoor unit will
stop automatically with space heating operation when the outdoor
temperature drops below the "bivalent ON temperature", and the
permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active.
N/A
When the bivalent operation function is disabled, space heating
operation by the outdoor unit is possible at all outdoor temperatures
(see operation ranges), and the permission signal for the auxiliary
boiler is ALWAYS deactivated.
To have an optimal operation when choosing possibility 2, it is for
[C‑04] recommended to choose a higher value than the default
value. Depending on the used boiler, the boiler efficiency should be
chosen as follows:
▪ [C‑03] Bivalent ON temperature: defines the outdoor temperature
below which the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler will be
active (closed, X8M/3+4 on option box EK2CB07CAV3) and
space heating by the outdoor unit will be stopped.
#
Code
Description
[C-04]
#
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
Code
Description
▪ 0: Very high
[7‑05]
[A.6.A]
▪ 1: High
▪ [C‑04] Bivalent hysteresis: defines the temperature difference
between bivalent ON temperature and bivalent OFF temperature.
▪ 2: Medium
Permission signal X8M/3+4 (on option box EK2CB07CAV3)
▪ 4: Very low
▪ 3: Low
a
INFORMATION
[C-04]
b
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([A.2.2.6.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in
menu structure [7.4.5.1], [7.4.5.2] and [7.4.5.3]. Do NOT
use overview settings.
TA
[C-03]
Outdoor temperature
Closed
Open
TA
a
b
#
Code
INFORMATION
Description
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
Boiler efficiency [A.6.A] or [7‑05] becomes visible when
bivalent is ON ([A.2.2.6.1] or [C‑02]).
CAUTION
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
Possibility 2
Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
The installer can set a temperature range ([C‑04]). Depending on the
energy prices, a calculated point Tcalc changes between this range.
[7.4.5.1]
N/A
INFORMATION
Description
Code
#
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
What is the high electricity
price?
[7.4.5.2]
N/A
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the outdoor unit.
What is the medium electricity
price?
[7.4.5.3]
N/A
What is the low electricity
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on X8M/3+4 of option box EK2CB07CAV3. When it is
activated, contact X8M/3+4 is closed. When it is
deactivated, X8M/3+4 is open. See the illustration
below for the schematic location of this contact.
price?
[7.4.6]
N/A
What is the fuel price?
NOTICE
Do NOT use overview settings!
When TA reaches the Tcalc point, then the bivalent heat source
permission will be active. To prevent too much switching, there is a
hysteresis of 3°C.
X8M
▪ [C‑03] ON temperature. Below this temperature, bivalent will
always be ON. Tcalc is ignored.
34
▪ [C‑04] Operation range between which Tcalc is calculated.
3°C
a
8.3.4
b
[C-03]
Tcalc
TA
Tcalc
a
b
#
N/A
[C-03]+[C-04]
Priorities
TA
For systems with a domestic hot water tank
Outdoor temperature
Calculated temperature
Closed
Open
Code
[C-03]
System settings
Description
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
73
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[5-02]
Description
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Space heating priority.
Defines whether domestic hot water is
made by booster heater only when
outdoor temperature is below space
heating priority temperature. It is
recommended to enable this function to
shorten tank heating operation time
and guaranteed domestic hot water
comfort.
#
[A.2.1.6]
Code
[D‑01]
▪ 1: The refrigerant part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a preferential kWh
rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by
the electricity company, the contact
will open and the unit will go in forced
off mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
close and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
▪ 1: enabled
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
▪ 2: The refrigerant part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a preferential kWh
rate power supply. When the
preferential kWh rate signal is sent by
the electricity company, the contact
will close and the unit will go in forced
off mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
open and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the domestic hot water will be
heated by booster heater only.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: 0°C).
N/A
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot
water temperature: set point correction
for the desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
Connection to a preferential kWh rate
power supply:
▪ 0 (default): The refrigerant part of the
outdoor unit is connected to a normal
power supply.
▪ 0: disabled
N/A
Description
[A.6.2.1]
[D‑00]
Which heaters are allowed to operate
during preferential kWh rate power
supply?
▪ 0 (default): None
▪ 1: Booster heater only
▪ 2: Backup heater only
▪ 3: All heaters
Range: 0°C~20°C (default: 10°C).
Auto-restart
See table below.
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the user interface settings at the time of the power
failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable this function.
Settings 1, 2 and 3 are only meaningful if
the preferential kWh rate power supply is
of type 1 or the hydro part of the outdoor
unit is connected to a normal kWh rate
power supply (via X3M/5+6) and the
backup heater and booster heater are
NOT connected to the preferential kWh
rate power supply.
If the power supply might get interrupted (e.g. preferential kWh rate
power supply), always enable the auto restart function. Continuous
control of the hydro part of the outdoor unit can be guaranteed
independent of the preferential kWh rate power supply status, by
connecting the hydro part of the outdoor unit to a normal kWh rate
power supply.
#
[A.6.1]
Code
[3‑00]
Description
Is the auto restart function of the unit
allowed?
▪ 0: No
▪ 1 (default): Yes
[D‑00]
Booster heater
0 (default)
Forced OFF
1
Permitted
2
Forced OFF
3
Permitted
Backup heater
Forced OFF
Compressor
Forced OFF
Permitted
Power saving function
Defines whether the power supply of the refrigerant part of the
outdoor unit can be interrupted (internally by Hydro part control)
during stand-still conditions (no space heating/cooling nor domestic
hot water demand). The final decision to allow power interruption of
the outdoor unit during standstill depends on the ambient
temperature, compressor conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be
enabled on the user interface in combination with the removal of the
power saving connector at the outdoor unit.
Installer reference guide
74
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
NOTICE
#
The power saving connector at the outdoor unit shall only
be removed when the main power supply to the application
is switched OFF.
Code
[5-07]
Description
Limit DI3
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.4]
[5-08]
Limit DI4
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
1
2
[A.6.3.5.3]
kW limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on power values.
3
[A.6.3.6.1]
[5-09]
Limit DI1
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.2]
[5-0A]
Limit DI2
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.3]
[5-0B]
Limit DI3
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.4]
#
N/A
Code
[E‑08]
Priority: Only applicable in case of an optional EKHW.
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
Power consumption control
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 14 for detailed information
about this functionality.
Code
[4-08]
Description
Mode:
▪ 0 (No limitation)(default): Disabled.
▪ 1 (Continuous): Enabled: You can
set one power limitation value (in A
or kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
▪ 2 (Digital inputs): Enabled: You can
set up to four different power
limitation values (in A or kW) to
which
the
system
power
consumption will be limited when the
corresponding digital input asks.
[A.6.3.2]
[4-09]
Type:
▪ 0 (Current): The limitation values are
set in A.
▪ 1 (Power)(default): The limitation
values are set in kW.
[A.6.3.3]
[5-05]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.4]
[5-09]
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
▪ 0 (None)(default): Backup heater and
booster
heater
can
operate
simultaneously.
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized.
Pwr consumpt. control
[A.6.3.1]
Limit DI4
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Description
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: Disabled
#
[5-0C]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized.
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1 or 2
▪ 0 (None)(default): Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
▪ 1 (BSH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the backup heater will
be limited first, before the booster
heater is limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Note: In case power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models), setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and booster
heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/backup
heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
In case power consumption control is ENABLED, setting [4‑01]
defines the priority of the electrical heaters depending on the
applicable limitation.
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Amp. limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on current values.
[A.6.3.5.1]
[5-05]
[A.6.3.5.2]
[5-06]
Limit DI1
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
Limit DI2
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
75
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Description
▪ 0 (None)(default): No heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the booster heater
will be limited first.
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the backup heater
(step 1 and/or step 2) will be limited
first, before the booster heater is
limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized. If the power consumption
control is enabled, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Average timer
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
#
[A.6.4]
Code
[1-0A]
Pump operation
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by [4‑02] or if
the outdoor temperature drops below the value set by [F‑01]. When
the pump operation is enabled, the pump operation is possible at all
outdoor temperatures.
#
N/A
▪ 1:
Possible
temperatures.
#
N/A
Code
[F‑09]
▪ 0: Pump will be deactivated.
▪ 2: 24 hours
▪ 1: Pump will be activated when
Ta<4°C (10 minutes ON – 10 minutes
OFF)
INFORMATION
Offset temperature external outdoor ambient sensor
Only applicable in case of an external outdoor ambient sensor is
installed and configured.
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. The setting can
be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation).
Description
–5°C~5°C, step: 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Forced defrost
You can manually start a defrost operation.
The decision to execute the manual defrost operation is made by the
outdoor unit and depends on ambient and heat exchanger
conditions. When the outdoor unit accepted the forced defrost
operation,
will be displayed on the user interface. If
is NOT
displayed within 6 minutes after forced defrost operation was
enabled, the outdoor unit ignored the forced defrost request.
#
[A.6.6]
Code
N/A
Installer reference guide
76
Description
▪ 1: 12 hours
If the power saving function is activated (see [E‑08]), the
average outdoor temperature calculation is only possible in
case the external outdoor temperature sensor is used. See
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on
page 25.
Code
outdoor
▪ 0: No averaging (default)
INFORMATION
[2‑0B]
all
Pump continue operation when flow
abnormality:
▪ 4: 72 hours
#
at
Pump operation during flow abnormality [F‑09] defines whether the
pump stops at flow abnormality or allow to continue operation when
flow abnormality occurs. This functionality is only valid in specific
conditions where it is preferable to keep the pump active when
Ta<4°C (pump will be activated for 10 minutes and deactivated after
10 minutes). Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage
resulting this functionality.
▪ 3: 48 hours
[A.6.5]
Description
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01]
depending
on
heating/cooling
operation mode.
Description
Outdoor average timer:
Code
[F‑00]
Description
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
If glycol is present in the system ([E‑0D] set to "1") and a
flow abnormality occurs, then [F‑09] will have NO effect,
and the pump will continue operation (intervals of 20
minutes ON – 4 minutes OFF).
Pump speed limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
#
N/A
Code
[9‑0D]
Description
Pump speed limitation
▪ 0: No limitation.
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 5~8 (default: 6): Limitation when no
actuators. When there is no heating/
cooling output, the pump speed
limitation is applicable. When there is
heating/cooling output, the pump
speed is only determined by delta T in
relation to the required capacity. With
this limitation range, delta T is
possible
and
the
comfort
is
guaranteed.
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
[9-0D]=0
[9-0D]=5
[9-0D]=8
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=6
[9-0D]=7
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
b (l/min)
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
a
b
External static pressure
Water flow rate
b (l/min)
Installer reference guide
77
8 Configuration
8.4
[1]
Menu structure: Overview user settings
Set time/date
Date
Time
Daylight Saving Time
Clock type
[2]
Holiday
<>
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Use day schedule
Home
[3]
Quiet mode
[4]
Operation mode
[5]
Select schedules
[2]
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Operation mode
Heating
Cooling
DHW
Away
Room temperature
LWT main
LWT additional
Tank temperature
[6]
Information
Sensor information
Energy metering
Error handling
User permission level
Actuators
Operation modes
Running hours
Version
[6.2]
Produced energy
[6.3]
User settings
Display
Temperature lock
Set schedules
Preset values
Allowed operation mode
Unit of measurement
Set weather dependent
Error information
Error history
Contact/helpdesk number
Warning history
[6.8]
[7]
Energy metering
Consumed elec.
Version
User interface
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
[7.1]
Display
Contrast
Backlit LCD time
User profile
Available home pages
[7.3]
Set schedules
Room temp.
LWT main
LWT additional
DHW temp
Booster heater permission
Quiet mode
DHW pump
[7.4]
Preset values
Room temperature
LWT main
Tank temperature
Quiet level
[7.7]
Set weather dependent
Main
Additional
[7.7.1] Main
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
[7.7.2] Additional
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
Installer reference guide
78
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
8 Configuration
8.5
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[A] Installer settings
Language
System layout
Space operation
Domestic hot water (DHW)
Heat sources
System operation
Commissioning
Overview settings
[A.2] System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
[A.2.1] Standard
Unit type
Compressor type
Indoor software type
Unit control method
Number of LWT zones
Pump operation mode
Power saving possible
User interface location
Glycol present
[A.2.2] Options
DHW pump
External sensor
Control box
Option box
LAN adapter
[A.2.2.E] Control box
Backup heater steps
BUH type
Preferential kWh rate
DHW operation
Contact type main
Contact type add.
[A.2.2.F] Option box
[A.3] Space operation
LWT settings
Room thermostat
Operation range
[A.3.1] Leaving water
Main
Additional
Delta T source
[A.3.2] Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Room temp. offset
Ext. room sensor offset
Room temp. step
[A.4] Domestic hot water
Type
Disinfection
Maximum setpoint
SP mode
Weather-dependent curve
[A.5] Heat sources
[A.3.3] Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
Space cooling On temp
[A.4.4] Disinfection
Disinfection
Operation day
Start time
Temperature target
Duration
Backup heater
[A.5.1] Backup heater
[A.6] System operation
Operation mode
Enable BUH step 2
Equilibrium temp.
Auto restart
Preferential kWh rate
Pwr consumpt. control
Averaging time
Ext amb. sensor offset
Forced defrost
Emergency
[A.7] Commissioning
Test run
UFH screed dryout
Air purge
Actuator test run
Ext. backup heat src
Alarm output
External kWh meter
External kWh meter
External sensor
PCC by digital inputs
[A.3.1.1] Main
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
Modulated LWT
Emitter type
[A.3.1.2] Additional
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
[A.3.1.3] Delta T source
Heating
Cooling
[A.6.2] Prefer. kWh rate PS
Allowed heaters
Forced pump OFF
[A.6.3] Pwr consmp ctrl
Mode
Type
Amp. value
kW value
Amp. limits for DI
kW limits for DI
Priority
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
79
9 Commissioning
9
Commissioning
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
9.1
Overview: Commissioning
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the outdoor unit.
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
Only if you use the optional backup heater:
Typical workflow
Depending on the backup heater type, backup heater
circuit breaker F1B (on the switch box of the backup
heater) is turned ON.
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2
3
4
Performing an air purge.
Performing a test run for the system.
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
Only for tanks with built-in booster heater:
5
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
9.2
Booster heater circuit breaker F2B (on the switch box of
the control box) is turned ON.
Precautions when commissioning
There are no water leaks inside the outdoor unit.
INFORMATION
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume" in
"6.3 Preparing water piping" on page 28.
NOTICE
If glycol was added to the system, confirm the correct
glycol concentration, and check if glycol setting [E‑0D]=1.
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
9.3
NOTICE
▪ Make sure glycol setting [E-0D] matches the liquid
inside the water circuit (0=water only, 1=water+glycol).
If the glycol setting is NOT set correctly, the liquid
inside the piping can freeze.
Checklist before commissioning
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK.
Depending on the system layout, not all components may be
available.
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
▪ When glycol is added to the system, but the glycol
concentration is lower than prescribed, the liquid inside
the piping can still freeze.
INFORMATION
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([4‑0E]), that disables automatic operation by the unit. At
first installation, setting [4‑0E] is by default set to "1",
meaning automatic operation is disabled. All protective
functions are then disabled. If the user interface home
pages are off, the unit will NOT operate automatically. To
enable automatic operation and the protective functions,
set [4‑0E] to "0".
The control box is properly mounted.
The option box is properly mounted.
Only if you use the optional backup heater:
The backup heater is properly mounted.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to the available documentation and the applicable
legislation:
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set [4‑0E] to "0", ending "installer-on-site" mode and
enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set [4‑0E] to "1" manually.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
▪ Between the outdoor unit and the control box
▪ Between the control box and the option box
▪ Between the control box and the backup heater
▪ Between the local supply panel and the control box
▪ Between the local supply panel and the option box
▪ Between the outdoor unit and the valves
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
The minimum flow rate is guaranteed in all conditions.
See "To check the water volume and flow rate" in
"6.3 Preparing water piping" on page 28.
To perform an air purge.
▪ Between the control box and the room thermostat
▪ Between the control box and the domestic hot water
tank
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have not been
bypassed.
Installer reference guide
80
To perform a test run.
To perform an actuator test run.
Underfloor screed dryout function
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
9 Commissioning
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate
INFORMATION
1
Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration which space
heating loops can be closed due to mechanical, electronic, or
other valves.
▪ To purge air, use all air purge valves present in the
system. This includes the manual air purge valve of the
outdoor unit, as well as any field-supplied valves.
2
Close all space heating loops that can be closed (see previous
step).
▪ If the system contains a backup heater, also use the air
purge valve of the backup heater.
3
Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To perform an
actuator test run" on page 82).
4
Go to [6.1.8]:
> Information > Sensor information > Flow rate
to check the flow rate. During pump test run operation, the unit
can operate below this minimum required flow rate.
▪ If the system contains valve kit EKMBHBP1, it is
required to – during the air purge – manually switch the
position of the valve kit's 3‑way valve by turning its
knob, this to prevent air from remaining in the bypass.
For more information, refer to the instruction sheet of
the valve kit.
Bypass valve foreseen?
Yes
No
Modify the bypass valve setting
to reach the minimum required
flow rate + 2 l/min
In case the actual flow rate is
below the minimum flow rate,
modifications at the hydraulic
configuration are required.
Increase the space heating loops
that can NOT be closed or install
a pressure‑controlled bypass
valve.
Minimum required flow rate
05+07 models
INFORMATION
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
12 l/min
To perform a manual air purge
9.4.2
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. When the air purge function is
running, the pump operates without actual operation of the unit and
the removal of air in the water circuit will start.
NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 53.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Manual and press
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manually: the unit will operate with a fixed pump speed and in a
fixed or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position
of the 3-way valve is a helpful feature to remove all air from the
water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. The operation speed of the pump (slow or quick)
can also be set.
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
the position of the 3-way valve between the space heating or the
domestic hot water heating mode.
.
Result: The manual air purge starts and the following screen
appears.
Tue 01:18
Air purge
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Adjust
Stop
Scroll
Typical workflow
5
Use the and buttons to scroll to Speed.
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
6
Use the
and
1
Performing a manual air purge
Result: Low
2
Performing an automatic air purge
Result: High
NOTICE
When purging air with the manual air purge valve of the
unit, collect any fluid that might leak out of the valve. If this
fluid is NOT collected, it might drip on internal components
and damage the unit.
buttons to set the desired pump speed.
7
If applicable, set the desired position of the 3-way valve (space
heating/domestic hot water)(space heating/domestic hot water).
Use the and buttons to scroll to Circuit.
8
Use the and buttons to set the desired position of the 3-way
valve (space heating/domestic hot water).
The outdoor unit is equipped with a manual air purge
valve. The air purge procedure requires manual action.
NOTICE
> Installer settings >
Result: SHC
Result: Tank
To perform an automatic air purge
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
81
9 Commissioning
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 53.
9.4.4
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select pump operation, a test run
of the pump will start).
3
Select Automatic and press
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
> Installer settings >
.
Result: Air purging will start and the following screen will be
shown.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 53.
2
Make sure the room temperature control, the leaving water
temperature control and the domestic hot water control are
turned OFF via the user interface.
3
Go to [A.7.4]:
Actuator test run.
4
Select an actuator and press
5
Select OK and press
Tue 01:18
Air purge
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
Scroll
Adjust
Stop
To perform an actuator test run
> Installer settings > Commissioning >
. Example: Pump.
.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It automatically stops when
finished. To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
INFORMATION
If the temperature of the water circuit is low, and glycol was
added to it, then the flow rate will NOT be displayed.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Booster heater test
To interrupt air purge
1
▪ Backup heater (step 1) test
Press
and press
purge function.
9.4.3
to confirm the interruption of the air
▪ Backup heater (step 2) test
▪ Pump test
To perform a test run
INFORMATION
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 53.
▪ 2-way valve test
2
Go to [A.7.1]:
run.
▪ Bivalent signal test
3
Select a test and press
4
Select OK and press
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Test
. Example: Heating.
.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically when done
(±30 min). To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
INFORMATION
When starting up the system in a cold climate, and NO
backup heater kit was installed, it may be required to start
up with a small water volume. To do this, gradually open
the heat emitters. As a result, the water temperature will
gradually rise. Monitor the inlet water temperature ([6.1.6]
in the menu structure) and make sure it does NOT drop
below 15°C.
INFORMATION
If 2 user interfaces are present, you can start a test run
from both user interfaces.
▪ The user interface used to start the test run displays a
status screen.
▪ The other user interface displays a "busy" screen. You
cannot use the user interface as long as the "busy"
screen is shown.
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
the test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
▪ 3-way valve test
▪ Alarm output test
▪ Cooling/heating signal test
▪ Quick heat-up test
▪ Circulation pump test
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
If a backup heater kit is part of the system, this function can be
executed without finishing the outdoor installation. In this case, the
backup heater will perform the screed dryout and supply the leaving
water without heat pump operation.
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit
is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
To monitor the temperature, go to [A.6] and select the information
you want to check.
Installer reference guide
82
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
9 Commissioning
▪ Use
and
to scroll through the schedule.
and
to adjust the selection.
▪ Use
If a time is selected, you can set the duration between 1 and
72 hours.
If a temperature is selected, you can set the desired leaving
water temperature between 15°C and 55°C.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
4
To add a new step, select "–h" or "–" on an empty line and
.
press
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
5
To delete a step, set the duration to "–" by pressing
6
Press
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 36 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
to save the schedule.
It is important that there is no empty step in the program.
The schedule will stop when a blank step is programmed
OR when 20 consecutive steps have been executed.
NOTICE
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 36 hours after
the first power-on.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
INFORMATION
Preferential kWh rate power supply cannot be used in
combination with underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure there is ONLY 1 user interface connected
to your system to perform an underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
NOTICE
1
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout.
2
Set a dryout program.
3
Select Start dryout and press
4
Select OK and press
▪ [4‑00]=1
▪ [C‑02]=0
.
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts and following
screen will be shown. It stops automatically when done. To stop it
manually, press
, select OK and press
.
▪ [D‑01]=0
▪ [4‑08]=0
▪ [4‑01]≠1
Tue 15:10
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
Screed dryout
1
14d 12h
25°C
Current step
Remaining
Desired LWT
Stop
Example:
T
.
24h (1)
36h (2)
25°C (1)
A1
To readout the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
Press
The current step of the program, the total remaining time, and
the current desired leaving water temperature will be displayed.
35°C (2)
INFORMATION
t
T
t
(1)
(2)
.
1
2
There is limited access to the menu structure. Only the
following menus can be accessed:
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
Duration (1~72 h)
Action step 1
Action step 2
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 53.
2
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout > Set dryout schedule.
3
Use the
,
,
, and
to program the schedule.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
▪ Information.
▪ Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH screed
dryout.
To interrupt an underfloor heating screed dryout
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 88. To reset the U3 error, your User
permission level needs to be Installer.
1
Go to the underfloor heating screed dryout screen.
2
Press
.
3
Press
to interrupt the program.
Installer reference guide
83
10 Hand-over to the user
4
Select OK and press
To activate or deactivate a function lock
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout program is stopped.
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switchoff, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status.
5
6
Go to [A.7.2]:
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
screed dryout > Dryout status > Stopped at and followed by the
last executed step.
1
Press
to go to the menu structure.
2
Press
for more than 5 seconds.
3
Select a function and press
4
Select Lock or Unlock, and press
.
.
To activate or deactivate button lock
1
Press
to go to one of the home pages.
2
Press
for more than 5 seconds.
Modify and restart the execution of the program.
10
11
Hand-over to the user
Maintenance and service
NOTICE
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
Maintenance must be done by an authorised installer or
service agent.
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
We recommend to do maintenance at least once a year.
However, applicable legislation might require shorter
maintenance intervals.
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
10.1
About locking and unlocking
11.1
If required, it is possible to lock the buttons of the main user
interface, making it impossible for the user to operate it. For the user
to be able to change setpoint temperatures, the simplified user
interface or an external room thermostat is then required.
You can use the following locking modes:
Overview: Maintenance and
service
This chapter contains information about:
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The inspection of the backup heater switch box.
▪ Function lock: Locks a specific function to prevent people from
changing its settings.
▪ The inspection of the control box switch box.
▪ Button lock: Locks all buttons to prevent users from changing
settings.
11.2
Possible function locks
Lock
Maintenance safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
If active, people cannot…
Room On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the room
temperature control.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
LWT On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the leaving
water temperature (main +
additional) control.
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
Tank On/OFF
Turn ON or OFF the domestic
hot water control.
Temperature up/down
Adjust temperatures.
11.2.1
Quiet mode
Use quiet mode.
Holiday
Use holiday mode.
See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor unit" on page 33 and "7.2.3 To open
the switch box cover of the outdoor unit" on page 34.
Operation mode
Set the space operation mode.
User settings
Change settings in [7]:
settings.
> User
11.2.2
Opening the outdoor unit
Opening the control box
See "7.2.4 To open the control box" on page 34.
To check if locking is active
1
Press
2
If
to go to one of the home pages.
is displayed, button lock is active.
11.2.3
Opening the option box
See "7.2.5 To open the option box" on page 34.
Note: If you are on a home page and try to use a function that is
locked, is displayed for 1 second.
Installer reference guide
84
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
12 Troubleshooting
11.2.4
Opening the backup heater
See "7.2.6 To open the backup heater" on page 34 and "7.2.7 To
open the switch box cover of the backup heater" on page 35.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
Checkpoints are:
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Heat exchanger
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
▪ Water pressure
▪ Water filter
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
▪ Water pressure relief valve
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Switch box
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Switch box
▪ Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
Water pressure
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
If applicable, also inspect the switch box of the control box, option
box, and backup heater.
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, and K5M in
the switch box of the backup heater, and K3M in the switch box of
the control box (depending on your installation) operate correctly.
All contacts of these contactors must be in open position when the
power is turned OFF.
WARNING
Water filter
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
Clean the water filter.
NOTICE
Handle the water filter with care. Do NOT use excessive
force when you reinsert the water filter so as NOT to
damage the water filter mesh.
Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
INFORMATION
Only if a domestic hot water tank with a built-in electrical
booster heater (EKHW) is part of the system.
2
1
3
4
It is recommended to remove lime buildup on the booster heater to
extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water. To do so,
drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the booster heater from
the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a bucket (or similar) with
lime-removing product for 24 hours.
5
12
Troubleshooting
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting
Water pressure relief valve
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
It contains information about:
Checkpoints are:
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
Before troubleshooting
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush the system and install an additional water filter (a
magnetic cyclone filter is preferable).
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
85
12 Troubleshooting
12.2
Possible causes
Precautions when troubleshooting
The water volume in the
installation is too low
WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, always make sure that the unit is disconnected
from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit breaker.
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
12.3.2
Corrective action
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.3.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 29).
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Possible causes
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low)
WARNING
Prevent hazard due to the inadvertent resetting of the
thermal cut-out: this appliance must NOT be supplied
through an external switching device, such as a timer, or
connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF
by the utility.
Corrective action
If the system contains a
backup heater:
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
12.3
Solving problems based on
symptoms
12.3.1
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or
cooling as expected
Possible causes
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the system does NOT
contain a backup heater:
It may be required to start up with
a small water volume. To do this,
gradually open the heat emitters.
As a result, the water
temperature will gradually rise.
Monitor the inlet water
temperature ([6.1.6] in the menu
structure) and make sure it does
NOT drop below 15°C.
Corrective action
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
The water flow is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 81) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 81).
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
12.3.3
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump (see the ESP curve in
the "Technical data" chapter).
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
Installer reference guide
86
The preferential kWh rate power This should match with the
supply settings and electrical
connections as explained in
connections do NOT match
"6.4 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 30 and "7.8.5 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 44.
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
Possible causes
There is air in the system
Corrective action
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 81) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 81).
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
Corrective action
12.3.6
Check and make sure that:
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The manometer is not broken.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
If the system contains a backup
heater: backup heater operation
is not activated
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.3.4 Changing the prepressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 30).
12.3.4
Replace the expansion vessel.
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.3.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 29 and
"6.3.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 30).
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
outdoor unit and the highest
point of the water circuit. If the
outdoor unit is located at the
highest point of the installation,
the installation height is
considered 0 m. The maximum
water circuit head is 10 m.
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check the
following, and then press the
reset button in the switch box:
▪ The water pressure
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
▪ The air purge operation
If the system contains a backup
heater: the backup heater
equilibrium temperature has not
been configured correctly
▪ [A.8] > Installer settings >
Overview settings [5‑01]
There is air in the system.
Purge air manually or
automatically. See the air purge
function in the "Commissioning"
chapter.
Too much heat pump capacity is
used for heating domestic hot
water (applies only to
installations with a domestic hot
water tank)
Check and make sure that the
"space heating priority" settings
have been configured
appropriately:
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
Corrective action
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
▪ [A.5.1.4] > Installer settings >
Heat sources > Backup heater
> Equilibrium temp. OR
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ The backup heater overcurrent
fuse has not been turned off. If
it has, check the fuse and turn
it back on.
Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken
Check and make sure that:
▪ [A.5.1.1] > Installer settings
> Heat sources > Backup
heater > Operation mode
[4‑00]
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Possible causes
Corrective action
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑02]
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑03]
12.3.7
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief ▪ Flush and clean the complete
valve.
tank including the piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
87
12 Troubleshooting
12.3.8
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
12.4.1
Error codes: Overview
Error codes of the outdoor unit
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief Contact your local dealer.
valve.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Possible causes
Refrigerant part
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A5
00
OU: High pressure cooling/Peak
cut/ freeze protection problem.
Please contact your dealer.
Corrective action
The disinfection function was
Program the start-up of the
interrupted by domestic hot water disinfection function when the
tapping
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
E1
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
E3
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Reheat or Reheat +
sched. is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Scheduled only is
selected, it is recommended to
program a Storage eco 3 hours
before the scheduled start-up of
the disinfection function to
preheat the tank.
The disinfection operation was
stopped manually: with the user
interface displaying the DHW
home page and its user
permission level set to Installer,
the
button was pressed
during disinfection operation.
00
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
00
Please contact your dealer.
E5
00
OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E6
00
OU: Compressor startup defect.
Please contact your dealer.
E7
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
unit fan motor.
Please contact your dealer.
E8
00
Do NOT press the
button
while the disinfection function is
active.
OU: Power input overvoltage.
Please contact your dealer.
EA
00
OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H0
The measured temperatures for
produced heat calculation are
NOT accurate.
OU: Actuation of high pressure
switch (HPS).
00
12.3.10 Symptom: The energy metering
(produced heat) is NOT working correctly
Possible causes
OU: PCB defect.
Corrective action
Execute a calibration of the
system by performing an actuator
test run of the pump (see
"9.4.4 To perform an actuator
test run" on page 82).
OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
H3
00
OU: Malfunction of high
pressure switch (HPS)
Please contact your dealer.
H6
00
OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor.
Please contact your dealer.
12.4
Solving problems based on error
codes
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
countermeasure before resetting the error code. This should be
done by a licensed installer or by your local dealer.
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
H8
00
OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system.
Please contact your dealer.
H9
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor
air thermistor.
Please contact your dealer.
F3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature.
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
Please contact your dealer.
F6
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure
in cooling.
Please contact your dealer.
Installer reference guide
88
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
12 Troubleshooting
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
FA
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure,
7H
06
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost.
actuation of HPS.
Manual reset.
Please contact your dealer.
JA
00
Check the plate heat exchanger.
OU: Malfunction of high
pressure sensor.
80
00
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
J3
00
Please contact your dealer.
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor.
81
00
00
Please contact your dealer.
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor.
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
J6
Returning water temperature
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
03
Heat exchanger frozen.
8F
00
Abnormal increase outlet
Please contact your dealer.
L3
00
OU: Electrical box temperature
rise problem.
Please contact your dealer.
L4
00
OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature rise.
Please contact your dealer.
L5
00
OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC).
water temperature (DHW).
Please contact your dealer.
P4
00
OU: Malfunction of radiating
fin temperature sensor.
8H
00
water temperature.
Please contact your dealer.
U0
00
Abnormal increase outlet
OU: Shortage of refrigerant.
Please contact your dealer.
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem.
Power reset required.
U2
00
Please contact your dealer.
OU: Defect of power supply
voltage.
A1
01
EEPROM reading error.
A1
00
EEPROM reading error.
AA
01
Backup heater overheated.
Please contact your dealer.
U7
00
OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU.
Please contact your dealer.
UA
00
OU: Indoor/outdoor combination
problem.
Power reset required.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
Hydro part
AC
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
01
Water flow problem.
Auto restart.
7H
04
00
Please contact your dealer.
AH
00
AJ
03
05
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling.
Manual reset.
Check the space heating/cooling
circuit.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Too long DHW heat-up time
required.
Check the domestic hot water
circuit.
7H
Tank disinfection function not
completed correctly.
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production.
Manual reset.
Booster heater overheated.
C0
00
C0
01
Flow sensor malfunction.
Manual reset.
Flow switch malfunction.
Auto reset.
Installer reference guide
89
12 Troubleshooting
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
C0
02
Flow switch malfunction.
C4
00
NOTICE
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
Manual reset.
Heat exchanger temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
CJ
02
Room temperature sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
EC
00
Abnormal increase tank
temperature.
EC
04
Tank preheating
H1
00
External temperature
Minimum required flow
05+07 models
12 l/min
If the 7H‑01 error persists, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display an error code that needs to be reset manually.
Depending on the problem, this error code is different:
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
04
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during domestic hot
water operation. Check the
domestic hot water circuit.
7H
05
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during space heating
operation. Check the space
heating circuit.
7H
06
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during cooling/defrost
operation. Check the space
heating/cooling circuit.
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
HC
00
Tank temperature sensor
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
U3
00
Additionally, this error code might
be an indication of frost damage
to the plate heat exchanger. In
that case, contact your local
dealer.
Under floor heating screed
dryout function not completed
correctly.
U4
00
Hydro part / refrigerant part
communication problem
U5
00
User interface
communication problem.
INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
INFORMATION
U8
01
UA
00
Connection with adapter lost
Please contact your dealer.
Hydro part / refrigerant part
matching problem.
Power reset required.
UA
16
Communication problem between
hydro part and control box.
UA
22
Communication problem between
control box and option box.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
Error EC-04 is reset automatically from the moment the
domestic hot water tank is preheated to a sufficiently high
temperature.
INFORMATION
If the unit detects flow when the pump is not running, an
external device might be causing flow, or there might be
something wrong with the flow measuring devices (flow
sensor and flow switch).
▪ If the flow sensor detects flow when the pump is not
running, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display error C0‑00. For the unit to resume
operation, this error needs to be reset manually.
▪ If the flow switch detects flow when the pump is not
running, the unit will temporarily stop operation and the
user interface will display error C0‑01. After some time,
the error will reset automatically and the unit will
resume operation. If the problem persists, the unit will
stop operation and the user interface will display error
C0‑02. For the unit to resume operation, this error
needs to be reset manually.
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
Installer reference guide
90
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
13 Disposal
b
c
d
e
Disposal
NOTICE
13.1
Overview: Disposal
Typical workflow
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
1
2
13.3
To start and stop forced cooling
Confirm that DIP switch SW2 is in COOL mode.
1
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to begin forced
cooling.
2
Press the forced cooling operation switch SW1 to stop forced
cooling.
Pumping down the system.
Bringing the system to a specialized treatment facility.
SW2
Do not try to dismantle the system yourself: the dismantling
of the system, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and other
parts must comply with applicable legislation. Units must
be treated at a specialised treatment facility for reuse,
recycling and recovery.
Closing direction
Hexagonal wrench
Valve lid
Liquid stop valve
SW3
SW1
13
COOL
HEAT
INFORMATION
For more details, see the service manual.
13.2
To pump down
Example: To protect the environment, pump down when disposing
of the unit.
It is NOT required to pump down when relocating the unit.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
NOTICE
Take care that while running forced cooling operation, the
water temperature remains higher than 5°C (see
temperature read out of the indoor unit). You can achieve
this, for example, by activating all fans of the fan coil units.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
NOTICE
During pump down operation, stop the compressor before
removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still
running and the stop valve is open during pump down, air
will be sucked into the system. Compressor breakage and
other injury will be the result due to abnormal pressure in
the refrigerant cycle.
Pump down operation will extract all refrigerant from the system into
the outdoor unit.
1
Remove the valve lid from the liquid stop valve and the gas stop
valve.
2
Carry out the forced cooling operation.
3
After 5 to 10 minutes (after only 1 or 2 minutes in case of very
low ambient temperatures (<−10°C)), close the liquid stop valve
with a hexagonal wrench.
4
Check with the manifold if the vacuum is reached.
5
After 2-3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced
cooling operation.
b
c
a
d
e
d
a
Gas stop valve
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
91
14 Technical data
14
Technical data
A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website (publicly accessible). The full set of latest technical data is
available on the Daikin extranet (authentication required).
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
R1T
Pump
Flow sensor
Air purge
Plate heat exchanger
12.7 CuT
Pressure sensor
t>
·15.9· CuT
12.7 CuT
12.7 CuT
12.7 CuT
Gas stop valve
with service port
4-way valve
High pressure switch p >
Expansion vessel
Shut-off valve with drain/fill valve
12.7 CuT
Refrigerant flow
7.9 CuT 7.9 CuT
Flow switch
Outlet
p
14.1
t>
Filter
Shut-off valve with
drain/fill valve
R1T Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
R3T Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
R4T Inlet water thermistor
Blow-off
Heating
R3T
t>
9.5 CuT
Muffler
Muffler
7.9 CuT
Discharge pipe thermistor
Liquid stop
valveV
6.4 CuT
Accumulator
Compressor
Muffler with filter
6.4 CuT
R4T
Inlet
7.9 CuT
Cooling
Safety valve
Filter
Outdoor air temperature thermistor
Motor-operated valve
Filter
6.4 CuT
Heat exchanger
Capillary tube 1
Muffler with filter
6.4 CuT
4.0 CuT 7.9 CuT
4.0 CuT 7.9 CuT
Capillary tube 2
Capillary tube 3
4.0 CuT
4.0 CuT
Capillary tube 4
Heat exchanger thermistor
M
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
7.9 CuT
12.7 CuT
Propeller fan
3D097222-1
Installer reference guide
92
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
14 Technical data
14.2
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the outdoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Outdoor unit: compressor module
Connector
C110~C112
Capacitor
Terminal
DB1, DB2, DB401
Rectifier bridge
Protective earth
DC_N1, DC_N2
Connector
BLK
Black
DC_P1, DC_P2
Connector
BLU
Blue
DCP1, DCP2,
Connector
BRN
Brown
DCM1, DCM2
Connector
GRN
Green
DP1, DP2
Connector
ORG
Orange
E1, E2
Connector
PPL
Purple
E1H
Drain pan heater
RED
Red
FU1~FU5
Fuse
WHT
White
HL1, HL2, HL402
Connector
YLW
Yellow
HN1, HN2, HN402
Connector
IPM1
Intelligent power module
L
Live
LED 1~LED 4
Indication lamps
(1) Connection diagram
(1) Connection diagram
Pilot lamp
Compressor switch box
Compressor switch box
Control box
Control box
LED A, LED B
M1C
Compressor motor
M1F
Fan motor
MR30, MR306,
MR307, MR4
Magnetic relay
MRM10, MRM20
Magnetic relay
MR30_A, MR30_B
Connector
N
Neutral
PCB1
Outdoor unit: hydro module
English
Translation
External outdoor ambient sensor External outdoor ambient sensor
option
option
Hydro switch box supplied from
compressor module
Hydro switch box supplied from
compressor module
Hydro switch box
Hydro switch box
Indoor
Indoor
NO valve
Normal open valve
Printed circuit board (main)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Normal kWh rate power supply
PCB2
Printed circuit board (inverter)
PCB3
Printed circuit board (service)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Q1DI
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q1L
Overload protector
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (compressor)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (compressor)
R1T
Thermistor (discharge)
Outdoor
Outdoor
R2T
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Preferential power supply
R3T
Thermistor (air)
Preferential kWh rate power
supply
S1NPH
Pressure sensor
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for hydro switch box
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for hydro switch box
S1PH
High pressure switch
(2) Hydro switch box layout
(2) Hydro switch box layout
S2~S503
Connector
(3) Notes
(3) Notes
SA1
Surge arrestor
X4M
SHEET METAL
Terminal strip on fixed plate
SW1, SW3
Push buttons
SW2, SW5
DIP switches
U
Connector
V
Connector
V2, V3, V401
Varistor
W
Connector
X11A, X12A
Connector
X1M, X2M
Terminal strip
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve coil
Y1R
Reversing solenoid valve coil
Z1C~Z4C
Ferrite core
Field wiring
Terminal strip
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Main terminal
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
Wiring depending on model
Switch box
PCB
(4) Legend
(4) Legend
A1P
Main PCB
A2P
Current loop PCB
E6H
Plate heat exchanger heater tape
E7H
Expansion vessel heater
Installer reference guide
93
14 Technical data
English
English
Translation
Q*DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
R6T
*
Translation
M3S
3-way valve for domestic hot
water
External outdoor ambient sensor
option
M4S
*
TR1
Power supply transformer
Q*DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
X*M
Terminal strip
Q2L/Q3L
*
Thermal protector booster heater
X*Y
Connector
R1T (A3P)
*
Ambient sensor On/OFF
thermostat
Service PCB
PCB3
# Shut-off valve
M2S
*:
#:
Optional
Field supply
R2T (A3P)
*
External sensor (floor or ambient)
R5T
*
Domestic hot water thermistor
S1S
# Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact
Control box
English
Translation
Valve kit
X*M/K1
Terminal strip
X*Y
Connector
K1A
Relay for heating
(1) Connection diagram
(1) Connection diagram
BUH option
Backup heater option
Control box
Control box
DHW option
Domestic hot water option
DHW pump
Domestic hot water pump
Dual set point application (refer
to installation manual)
Dual set point application (refer
to installation manual)
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
(1) Connection diagram
(1) Connection diagram
Hydro switch box
BUH option
Backup heater option
Normal open valve
Control box
Control box
Only for ***
Only for ***
Only for ***
Only for ***
Only for ext. sensor (floor or
ambient)
Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
(2) Notes
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Option box
Option box
Hydro switch box
NO valve
Relay for cooling
K2A
*:
#:
Optional
Field supply
Control box option: backup heater
English
Translation
(2) Notes
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
Wiring depending on model
Preferential kWh rate power
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 5 V DC detection supply contact: 5 V DC detection
(voltage supplied by PCB)
(voltage supplied by PCB)
(2) Notes
Switch box
PCB
(2) Notes
X1M
(3) BUH kit switch box
(3) BUH kit switch box
(4) Legend
(4) Legend
F1B
Overcurrent fuse backup heater
K1R
Relay backup heater (step 1)
K2R
Relay backup heater (step 2)
(only for *9W)
Option
K1M
Contactor backup heater (step 1)
Wiring depending on model
K2M
Contactor backup heater (step 2)
(only for *9W)
K5M
Safety contactor backup heater
(only for *9W)
Main terminal
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Switch box
PCB
(3) Control switch box layout
(3) Control switch box layout
Q*DI
(4) Legend
(4) Legend
Q1L
Thermal protector backup heater
R2T
Outlet backup heater thermistor
X*M
Thermistor strip
A3P
*
On/OFF thermostat (PC=power
circuit)
A3P
*
Heat pump convector
A4P
*
Extension PCB (control, optional)
A7P
*
Receiver PCB (wireless On/OFF
thermostat)
F2B
*
Overcurrent fuse booster heater
A5P
X*Y
Connector
*:
#:
User interface PCB
Optional
Field supply
Control box option: option box
English
Translation
(1) Connection diagram
(1) Connection diagram
K3M
*
M2P
# Domestic hot water pump
Alarm output
Alarm output
M2S
# Shut-off valve
Control box
Control box
Installer reference guide
94
Contactor booster heater
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
14 Technical data
English
English
Translation
S1P
Translation
# Digital power limitation input 1
Electric pulse meter inputs: 5 V
DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Electric pulse meter inputs:
5 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Ext. heat source
External heat source
External indoor ambient sensor
option
External indoor ambient sensor
option
S4P
# Digital power limitation input 4
S5P-S6P
# Electrical meters
Indoor
Indoor
X*M
Terminal strip
Max. load
Maximum load
X*Y
Connector
Max. voltage
Maximum voltage
(3) Notes
(3) Notes
Minimum load
X1M
Min. load
Option box
S2P
# Digital power limitation input 2
S3P
# Digital power limitation input 3
Option box
Power limitation digital inputs: 5 Power limitation digital inputs:
V DC detection (voltage supplied 5 V DC detection (voltage
by PCB)
supplied by PCB)
Main terminal
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Space C/H On/OFF output
Space cooling/heating On/OFF
output
Option
(2) Legend
(2) Legend
Wiring depending on model
A4P
Extension PCB (control, optional)
Switch box
Q*DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
R6T
*
External indoor ambient sensor
option
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
PCB
(4) Option switch box layout
*:
#:
(4) Option switch box layout
Optional
Field supply
Installer reference guide
95
14 Technical data
Electrical connection diagram
Typical configuration
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance
to power cables > 5 cm
- Available heaters: see combination table
2 low voltage wires
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 4 high voltage wires
Control
Box
Control
Box
Power supply
1
Only for *DLQ*
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 4 high voltage wires
Inside: 6 or 7 wires to BUH
BUH
Standard part
Only for normal power supply installation
3 core
unit power supply: 230 V + earth
Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply:
3 core
230 V + earth
Valve kit
1
X4M: L-N-earth
Only for EKRSCA1
External outdoor thermistor
2 core
signal
X5M: 1-2
X5Y
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
X5M: 5-6
X5M: 3-4
2 core
2x0.75
Optional part
X3M: 3-4
X3M: 5-6
Optional
part
X3M: 1-2
2 core
normal kWh rate power supply for unit: 230 V
Only for *BLQ*
Standard: 4 low voltage wires
Optional: 5 high voltage wires
Inside: 6 or 7 wires to BUH
Valve kit: 3 wires
BUH
Control
Box
Monobloc unit
Field supply
communication
2 core
2x0.75 2 core
2x0.75
communication
communication
Optional part
communication
2 core
230V
2 core
2 core 230V
230V
2 core
DHW pump
1 core
230V
230V
2 core
2 core
Shut-off valve
F1B: L1-L2-L3
or L-N + earth
X15M: 5-6-7
Booster heater
X6M
or
X9M
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 or 3 core
signal
Only for *KHW(E/S)*
5 core
5Gx2.5
230 V
Q2L/Q3L - clixon
3
Booster heater
K1
Only for *KHWP*/*HYC*
3 core 3Gx2.5
R5T - thermistor
water temperature
X2M: 20-21
X2M: 22-23
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
Main: X2M: 1-2
Add: X2M: 1a-2
2
230 V
signal
X2M: 1-2-1a
X2M: 5-6
X2M: 12-11
X2M: 13-14-15
Domestic hot
water tank
3
X8M: 8-9
X8M: 10
2
F2B: L-N + earth
X15M: 1-2
X15M: 3-4
X2M: 9-10
3 core
BUH option
4 or 3 core
Backup heater power supply (3/6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
X8M: 6-7-10
X8M: 6-7
230V
Booster heater power supply (3 kW): 230 V + earth
2
X2M: 1-2-1a
X8M: 4-5
2
X2M: 1-2
X8M: 6-7
Control box power supply: 230 V + earth
230 V
3 core
Dual setpoint application
(refer to installation manual)
3 core
signal
3 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
signal
5 core for C/H operation
4 core for H only operation
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
230 V
A7P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
A3P: X1M: 1-3
R2T
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
X11M: 3-4-5-6
Optional part
Power limitation
demand input 1
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 4
X2M: 3-4
Power supply
Only for *KRTETS
Field supply
Option box
X4M: 1-2-earth
X1M: L-N-PE
2 core
(3m included)
signal
Only for
(heat pump convector)
4 core
230 V
X2M: 7-8
X8M: 5-4-3
Optional part
A3P: X1M: C-com-H
Field supply
X4M: 1-2-earth
3 way valve
M3S (when *KHW is installed)
selection domestic hot water-floor heating
Optional part
Only for *KRUCB*
A5P: P1-P2 user interface
Control box
Valve kit
Standard part
A5P: P1-P2 user interface
A4P: X5A: 1-2-3
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
3 core
communication
3 core
230 V
X2M: 5-6
X2M: 13-15
X2M: 3-4
X8M: 3-4
X2M: 1-2
X8M: 1-2
X2M: 11-12
X2M: 7-8
A4P: X5A: 1-2-3
X1M: L-N-PE
X2M: 9-10
X2M: 1a-2a
2 core
signal
2 core
230 V
2 core
230 V
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
Alarm Output
Ext. heat source (eg boiler)
Space cooling/heating
On/OFF output
Electricity pulse
meter input 1
Electricity pulse
meter input 2
External indoor thermistor
Only for KRCS01-1
4D09752-1C
14.3
Valve kit necessity
For reversible systems (heating+cooling) in which a backup heater is installed, the installation of valve kit EKMBHBP1 is required if
condensation is expected inside the backup heater.
Installer reference guide
96
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
14 Technical data
31
31
28
28
25
25
22
22
19
19
16
16
13
13
10
10
A (°C)
A (°C)
7
20
23
26
29
7
32
B (°C DB)
A
B
Leaving water evaporator temperature
Dry-bulb temperature
Relative humidity 40%
Relative humidity 60%
Relative humidity 80%
Example: Given are an ambient temperature of 25°C and a relative
humidity of 40%. If the leaving water evaporator temperature is
<12°C, condensation will occur.
Note: See the psychrometric chart for more information.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
97
14 Technical data
14.4
ESP curve: Outdoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
EDLQ05CAV3+EBLQ05CAV3
A (kPa)
80
70
60
50
40
30
C
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
B (l/min)
4D097263
EDLQ07CAV3+EBLQ07CAV3
A (kPa)
80
70
60
50
40
C
30
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
B (l/min)
4D097263
A
B
C
External static pressure
Water flow rate
Operation range
Notes:
▪ About the dashed lines: The operation area is extended to lower
flow rates only in case the unit operates with heat pump only, and
the temperature of the flow medium is sufficiently high. (This does
not apply to start-up operation, defrost operation, and backup
heater operation in case a backup heater is installed.)
▪ The upper operation range is only valid if the flow medium is
water. If glycol is added to the system, the operation range limit is
lower.
▪ Selecting a flow outside the operating area can damage the unit or
cause the unit to malfunction.
Installer reference guide
98
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
15 Glossary
15
Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, which explains (if relevant) how to install,
configure, operate and/or maintain the product or
application.
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
Field supply
Equipment not made by Daikin that can be combined with
the product according to the instructions in the
accompanying documentation.
EBLQ05+07CAV3 + EDLQ05+07CAV3 + EKCB07CAV3 +
EK2CB07CAV3 + EKMBUHCA3V3 + EKMBUHCA9W1
Daikin Altherma low temperature monobloc
4P405544-1D – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
99
1/8
Field settings table
[6.8.2] = .... ID66F2
Applicable units
*BLQ05CAV3
*DLQ05CAV3
*BLQ07CAV3
*DLQ07CAV3
Notes
(*1) *B*
(*2) *D*
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
2/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
User settings
└─ Preset values
└─ Room temperature
7.4.1.1
Comfort (heating)
Range, step
Default value
R/W
7.4.1.2
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.1.3
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.1.4
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.1
[8-09]
└─ LWT main
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.2
[8-0A]
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.3
[8-07]
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.4
[8-08]
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.5
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.6
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.7
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.8
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.3.1
[6-0A]
└─ Tank temperature
Storage comfort
R/W
7.4.3.2
[6-0B]
Storage eco
R/W
7.4.3.3
[6-0C]
Reheat
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
21°C
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
19°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
24°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
26°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
40°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
-2°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
└─ Quiet level
7.4.4
7.4.5.1
7.4.5.2
7.4.5.3
[C-0C]
[D-0C]
[C-0D]
[D-0D]
[C-0E]
[D-0E]
└─ Electricity price
High
R/W
0: Level 1
1: Level 2
2: Level 3
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
Medium
R/W
Low
R/W
└─ Fuel price
7.4.6
└─ Set weather dependent
└─ Main
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.1.1
[1-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-01]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-02]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.1.2
[1-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-08]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-09]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
└─ Additional
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.2.1
[0-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-01]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-02]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.2.2
[0-04]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-05]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
Installer settings
└─ System layout
└─ Standard
Unit type
A.2.1.1
[E-00]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
8,0/kWh
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
35°C
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/O
A.2.1.2
[E-01]
Compressor type
R/O
A.2.1.3
[E-02]
Indoor software type
R/O
A.2.1.7
[C-07]
Unit control method
R/W
A.2.1.8
[7-02]
Number of LWT zones
R/W
A.2.1.9
[F-0D]
Pump operation mode
R/W
A.2.1.A
[E-04]
Power saving possible
R/O
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
0~5
2: Monobloc
0~1
0: 8
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
0: No
1: Yes
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
3/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
A.2.1.B
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
User interface location
R/W
Glycol present
R/W
A.2.1.C
[E-0D]
A.2.2.A
[D-02]
A.2.2.B
[C-08]
External sensor
R/W
A.2.2.E.1
[E-03]
└────────────────── Control box
Backup heater steps
R/W
A.2.2.E.2
[5-0D]
BUH type
R/W
A.2.2.E.3
[D-01]
Preferential kWh rate
R/W
A.2.2.E.4
[E-05]
DHW operation
R/W
A.2.2.E.5
[C-05]
Contact type main
R/W
A.2.2.E.6
[C-06]
Contact type add.
R/W
A.2.2.F.1
[C-02]
└────────────────── Option box
Ext. backup heat src
R/W
A.2.2.F.2
[C-09]
Alarm output
R/W
A.2.2.F.3
[D-08]
External kWh meter 1
R/W
A.2.2.F.4
[D-09]
External kWh meter 2
R/W
A.2.2.F.5
[C-08]
External sensor
R/W
A.2.2.F.6
[D-04]
PCC by digital inputs
R/W
└─ Options
DHW pump
R/W
└─ Capacities
Booster heater
A.2.3.1
[6-02]
A.2.3.2
[6-03]
BUH: step 1
R/W
A.2.3.3
[6-04]
BUH: step 2
R/W
└─ Space operation
└─ LWT settings
└────────────────── Main
A.3.1.1.1
LWT setpoint mode
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.1
[9-01]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.2
[9-00]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.3
[9-03]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.4
[9-02]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.5
[8-05]
Modulated LWT
R/W
A.3.1.1.7
[9-0B]
Emitter type
R/W
└────────────────── Additional
LWT setpoint mode
R/W
R/W
A.3.1.2.1
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.1
[9-05]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
A.3.1.2.2.2
[9-06]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.3
[9-07]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.4
[9-08]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.3.1
[9-09]
└────────────────── Delta T source
Heating
R/W
A.3.1.3.2
[9-0A]
Cooling
R/W
A.3.2.1.1
[3-07]
└─ Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (heating)
A.3.2.1.2
[3-06]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.2.1.3
[3-09]
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.2.1.4
[3-08]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: At unit
1: In room
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
3: Circul. Pump
4: CP & disinf. Sh
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
0~5
1: 1P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2)
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
0: No
1: Yes
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0~2
1: Thermo ON/OFF
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: 0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: No
1: Yes
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: Quick
1: Slow
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
16°C
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
4/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.3.2.2
[2-0A]
Room temp. offset
R/W
A.3.2.3
[2-09]
Ext. room sensor offset
R/W
Room temp. step
R/W
A.3.2.4
A.3.3.1
[4-02]
A.3.3.2
[F-01]
A.4.1
Range, step
Default value
└─ Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
R/W
Space cooling On temp
R/W
└─ Domestic hot water (DHW)
└─ Type
[6-0D]
└─ Disinfection
Disinfection
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: 0,5 °C
1: 1 °C
14~35 °C, step: 1°C
25°C
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
R/W
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
A.4.4.1
[2-01]
A.4.4.2
[2-00]
Operation day
R/W
A.4.4.3
[2-02]
Start time
R/W
A.4.4.4
[2-03]
Temperature target
R/W
A.4.4.5
[2-04]
Duration
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
└─ Maximum setpoint
A.4.5
[6-0E]
R/W
40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
R/W
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
└─ SP mode
A.4.6
A.4.7
[0-0B]
└─ Weather dependent curve
Weather-dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0C]
Weather-dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0D]
A.4.7
[0-0E]
A.5.1.1
A.5.1.3
A.5.1.4
A.6.1
Weather-dependent curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
Weather-dependent curve
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
└─ Heat sources
└─ Backup heater
Operation mode
[4-00]
R/W
R/W
[4-07]
Enable BUH step 2
R/W
[5-01]
Equilibrium temp.
R/W
└─ System operation
└─ Auto restart
[3-00]
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: No
1: Yes
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
-4°C
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
└─ Preferential kWh rate
Allowed heaters
R/W
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: Forced off
1: As normal
A.6.2.1
[D-00]
A.6.2.2
[D-05]
Forced pump OFF
R/W
A.6.3.1
[4-08]
└─ Pwr consumpt. Control
Mode
R/W
A.6.3.2
[4-09]
Type
R/W
A.6.3.3
[5-05]
Amp. value
R/W
A.6.3.4
[5-09]
kW value
R/W
A.6.3.5.1
[5-05]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
A.6.3.5.2
[5-06]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.5.3
[5-07]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.5.4
[5-08]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.6.1
[5-09]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
A.6.3.6.2
[5-0A]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.6.3
[5-0B]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.6.4
[5-0C]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.7
[4-01]
Priority
A.6.4
[1-0A]
A.6.5
[2-0B]
R/W
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
└─ Averaging time
R/W
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
└─ Ext amb. sensor offset
└─ Boiler efficiency
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
5/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
A.6.A
[7-05]
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
R/W
0: Manual
1: Automatic
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
35°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0: No
1: Yes
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
4~16°C, step: 1°C
16°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
4
2
1
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
16°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
└─ Emergency
A.6.C
A.8
└─ Overview settings
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
A.8
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-04]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-04]
Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone.
R/W
A.8
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone
R/W
A.8
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-0A]
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
R/W
A.8
[2-00]
When should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
A.8
[2-01]
Should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
A.8
[2-02]
When should the disinfection function start?
R/W
A.8
[2-03]
What is the disinfection target temperature?
R/W
A.8
[2-04]
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
R/W
A.8
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-06]
Room frost protection
R/W
A.8
[2-09]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0A]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0B]
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
R/W
A.8
[3-00]
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[3-01]
[3-02]
[3-03]
[3-04]
[3-05]
[3-06]
-----What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-07]
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-08]
What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[3-09]
What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[4-00]
What is the BUH operation mode?
R/W
A.8
[4-01]
Which electric heater has priority?
R/W
A.8
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
6/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.8
[4-03]
Operation permission of the booster heater.
R/W
A.8
[4-04]
How to protect the water pipes from freezing
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[4-05]
[4-06]
[4-07]
--- (Do not change this value)
Enable the second step of the backup heater?
R/W
A.8
[4-08]
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
R/W
A.8
[4-09]
Which power limitation type is required?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[4-0A]
[4-0B]
-Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[4-0D]
Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset.
R/W
A.8
[4-0E]
Is the installer on site?
R/W
A.8
[5-00]
[5-01]
Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
R/W
A.8
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
R/W
A.8
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
R/W
A.8
[5-05]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-06]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-07]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-08]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-09]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-0A]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-0B]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-0C]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-0D]
What type of backup heater installation is used?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[5-0E]
[6-00]
-The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
R/W
A.8
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
R/W
A.8
[6-02]
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
R/W
A.8
[6-03]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
R/W
A.8
[6-04]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[6-05]
[6-06]
[6-07]
[6-08]
---What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[6-09]
[6-0A]
-What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0B]
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0C]
What is the desired reheat temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0D]
What is the desired DHW production type?
R/W
A.8
[6-0E]
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
R/W
A.8
[7-00]
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[7-01]
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[7-02]
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[7-03]
[7-04]
[7-05]
--Boiler efficiency
R/W
A.8
A.8
[8-00]
[8-01]
-Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
R/W
R/W
A.8
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
R/W
A.8
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
R/W
A.8
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
R/W
A.8
[8-05]
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
R/W
A.8
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
R/W
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Limited
1: No limit
2: Most optimum
3: Optimum
4: Only legionella
0: Continuous pump operation
1: Intermittent pump operation
2: No protection
0
0/1
0: No
1: Yes
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
-4°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~5
1: 1P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2)
1
2~20°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW
0
0
0
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
2,5
0
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
3 hour
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
7/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[8-07]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[8-08]
What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[8-09]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
[8-0A]
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[8-0B]
[8-0C]
[8-0D]
[9-00]
---What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-01]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-02]
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-03]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-04]
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[9-05]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-06]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-07]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-08]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-09]
What is the desired delta T in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-0A]
What is the desired delta T in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-0B]
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
R/W
A.8
[9-0C]
Room temperature hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[9-0D]
Pump speed limitation
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[9-0E]
[A-00]
[A-01]
[A-02]
[A-03]
[A-04]
[B-00]
[B-01]
[B-02]
[B-03]
[B-04]
[C-00]
[C-01]
[C-02]
-------------Is an external backup heat source connected?
R/W
A.8
[C-03]
Bivalent activation temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-04]
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-05]
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-06]
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-07]
What is the unit control method in space operation?
R/W
A.8
[C-08]
Which type of external sensor is installed?
R/W
A.8
[C-09]
What is the required alarm output contact type?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[C-0A]
[C-0C]
-High electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0D]
Medium electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0E]
Low electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-00]
Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
[D-01]
Forced off contact type
R/W
A.8
[D-02]
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
R/W
A.8
[D-03]
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
R/W
A.8
[D-04]
Is the option box used for PCC ?
R/W
A.8
[D-05]
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
[D-07]
--
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
45°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
40°C
13
10
16
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~55°C, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: Quick
1: Slow
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
0~8, step:1
0 : 100%
1~4 : 80~50%
5~8 : 80~50%
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: -25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0~2
0: 1: Thermo ON/OFF
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0~3
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
3: Circul. Pump
4: CP & disinf. Sh
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -2 to 2°C)
2: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -2 to 2°C)
3: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -4 to 4°C)
4: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -4 to 4°C)
0: No
1: Yes
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
8/8
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[D-08]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
A.8
[D-09]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[D-0A]
[D-0B]
[D-0C]
--What is the high electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0D]
What is the medium electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0E]
What is the low electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[E-00]
Which type of unit is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-01]
Which type of compressor is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-02]
What is the indoor unit software type?
R/O
A.8
[E-03]
What is the number of backup heater steps?
R/W
A.8
[E-04]
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
R/O
A.8
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[E-06]
[E-07]
[E-08]
--Power saving function for outdoor unit.
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[E-09]
[E-0A]
[E-0B]
[E-0C]
[E-0D]
----Is the system filled with glycol ?
R/W
A.8
[F-00]
Pump operation allowed outside range.
R/W
A.8
[F-01]
Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[F-02]
[F-03]
[F-04]
[F-05]
[F-06]
[F-09]
-----Pump operation during flow abnormality.
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[F-0A]
[F-0B]
[F-0C]
[F-0D]
---What is the pump operation mode?
R/W
4P405542-1A - 2017.04
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0
2
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~5
2: Monobloc
0~1
0: 8
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0
0
0
0: No
1: Yes
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
3
5
0
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0
1
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
(*1) *B*_(*2) *D*
4P405544-1D 2017.04
Copyright 2015 Daikin
Download PDF
Similar pages